308
FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    13

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Page 2: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest ofcontinuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any timewithout notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in aretrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.Errors and omissions excepted.© Ford Motor Company 2011

All rights reserved.Part Number: (CG3568en) 08/2011 20110622085519

Page 3: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

IntroductionAbout This Manual...........................................7Symbols Glossary.............................................7Parts and Accessories.....................................7

At a GlanceAt a Glance........................................................10

Child SafetyChild Seats.........................................................17Child Seat Positioning...................................18Booster Seats..................................................20ISOFIX Anchor Points....................................21Child Safety Locks..........................................22

Occupant protectionPrinciple of Operation..................................24Fastening the seat belts..............................25Seat belt height adjustment......................26Seat belt reminder.........................................26Using seat belts during pregnancy...........27Disabling the passenger airbag.................27

Keys and Remote ControlsGeneral Information on Radio

Frequencies..................................................29Programming the remote control............29Changing the remote control

battery............................................................29

LocksLocking and Unlocking.................................32Keyless Entry....................................................34Global Opening and Closing......................36

Engine immobiliserPrinciple of Operation..................................38Coded keys.......................................................38Arming the engine immobiliser................38Disarming the engine immobiliser...........38

AlarmPrinciple of Operation..................................39Arming the alarm...........................................40Disarming the alarm.....................................40

Steering WheelAdjusting the Steering Wheel.....................41Audio Control....................................................41Voice Control...................................................42

Wipers and WashersWindscreen Wipers.......................................43Autowipers.......................................................43Windscreen Washers....................................44Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........44Headlamp Washers......................................45Checking the Wiper Blades........................45Changing the Wiper Blades.......................45

LightingLighting Control...............................................47Autolamps........................................................48Automatic Main Beam Control.................48Front Fog Lamps............................................50Rear Fog Lamps.............................................50Adjusting the Headlamps - Vehicles

With: Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps....................................................51

Headlamp Levelling.......................................51Hazard Warning Flashers.............................51Direction Indicators........................................52Cornering Lamps............................................52Interior Lamps.................................................53Removing a Headlamp................................54Changing a Bulb.............................................55Bulb Specification Chart.............................62

Windows and MirrorsPower Windows..............................................63

1

Table of Contents

Page 4: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Exterior Mirrors................................................64Electric exterior mirrors................................65Auto-Dimming Mirror...................................66Blind Spot Monitor........................................66

Instrument ClusterGauges...............................................................69Warning Lamps and Indicators..................71Audible Warnings and Indicators..............73

Information DisplaysGeneral Information......................................75Trip Computer.................................................82Personalised Settings..................................82Information Messages.................................83

Climate ControlPrinciple of Operation..................................94Air Vents............................................................94Manual Climate Control..............................95Automatic Climate Control........................97Heated Windows and Mirrors.................100Electric sunroof.............................................100Auxiliary Heater.............................................102

SeatsSitting in the Correct Position..................105Manual Seats.................................................105Head Restraints............................................106Power Seats...................................................108Rear Seats.......................................................109Heated Seats..................................................110

Convenience featuresInstrument Lighting Dimmer......................111Clock....................................................................111Cigar Lighter......................................................111Auxiliary Power Points..................................111Cup Holders.....................................................112

Glasses Holder................................................112Childminder Mirror.........................................112Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket................113USB port............................................................113Satellite Navigation Unit Holder..............113Floor Mats.........................................................113

Starting and Stopping theEngine

General Information.....................................114Ignition Switch................................................114Steering Wheel Lock....................................114Starting a Petrol Engine..............................115Starting a Petrol Engine - E85..................115Starting a Diesel Engine..............................116Keyless Starting.............................................116Diesel Particulate Filter...............................118Switching Off the Engine............................119Engine Block Heater.....................................119

Start-StopPrinciple of Operation.................................120Using start-stop............................................120

Eco ModePrinciple of Operation.................................122Using Eco mode............................................122

Fuel and RefuellingSafety Precautions.......................................123Fuel Quality - Petrol.....................................123Fuel Quality - E85.........................................123Fuel Quality - Diesel.....................................123Catalytic Converter......................................124Fuel filler flap.................................................124Refuelling.........................................................126Refuelling - E85.............................................126Fuel Consumption........................................127Technical Specifications............................127

2

Table of Contents

Page 5: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

TransmissionManual Transmission..................................129Automatic Transmission............................129

BrakesPrinciple of Operation.................................132Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes...........................................................132Parking Brake..................................................132

Stability ControlPrinciple of Operation.................................133Using Stability Control................................133

Hill Start AssistPrinciple of Operation.................................134Using hill start assist...................................134

Parking AidsPrinciple of Operation.................................136Using the Parking Aid - Vehicles With:

Rear Parking Aid.......................................136Using the Parking Aid - Vehicles With:

Front and Rear Parking Aid...................137

Rear view cameraPrinciple of Operation................................140Using the Rear View Camera...................140

Active Park AssistPrinciple of Operation.................................143Using active park assist..............................143

Cruise ControlPrinciple of Operation................................146Using Cruise Control...................................146

Adaptive cruise control(ACC)

Principle of Operation................................148

Using Adaptive Cruise Control................150Forward alert function................................152

Speed LimiterPrinciple of Operation.................................153Using the speed limiter...............................153

Driver AlertPrinciple of Operation.................................154Using driver alert...........................................154

Lane Departure WarningPrinciple of Operation.................................156Using lane departure warning.................156

Lane Keeping AidPrinciple of Operation.................................158Using the lane keeping aid........................158

Traffic Sign RecognitionPrinciple of Operation................................160Using traffic sign recognition...................160

Active City StopPrinciple of Operation.................................162Using Active City Stop................................162

Load CarryingGeneral Information....................................164Luggage Anchor Points..............................164Luggage Covers.............................................164Cargo Nets......................................................165Dog Guard.......................................................166Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................168

TowingTowing a Trailer.............................................170Retractable tow ball....................................170Tow Ball............................................................173

3

Table of Contents

Page 6: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Driving HintsRunning-In.......................................................176Cold Weather Precautions........................176Driving Through Water................................176

Roadside EmergenciesFirst Aid Kit.......................................................177Warning Triangle............................................177

FusesFuse Box Locations......................................178Changing a Fuse............................................179Fuse Specification Chart...........................180

Vehicle recoveryTowing Points................................................188Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......188

MaintenanceGeneral Information....................................190Opening and Closing the Bonnet...........190Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L

Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)..............192Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L EcoBoost

SCTi (Sigma).............................................193Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L

Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel..................194Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L

Duratec-HE (MI4)....................................195Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L

Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel.................197Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16V

Ti-VCT (Sigma)........................................198Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi

(Sigma).......................................................198Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE

(MI4).............................................................198Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi

(DV) Diesel/2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel............................................................198

Engine Oil Check..........................................198Engine Coolant Check................................199

Brake and Clutch Fluid Check................200Washer Fluid Check...................................200Technical Specifications............................201

Vehicle CareCleaning the Exterior..................................204Cleaning the Interior...................................204Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............205

Vehicle batteryJump-Starting the Vehicle.......................206Changing the Vehicle Battery.................207Battery connection points........................207

Wheels and TyresGeneral Information...................................208Changing a Road Wheel...........................208Tyre Repair Kit................................................213Tyre Care..........................................................216Using Winter Tyres........................................217Using Snow Chains.......................................217Tyre Pressure Monitoring System...........217Technical Specifications............................218

Vehicle identificationVehicle Identification Plate.......................221Vehicle Identification Number................222

Capacities and Specific-ations

Technical Specifications...........................223

Audio introductionImportant audio information...................227

Audio unit overviewAudio unit overview....................................228

4

Table of Contents

Page 7: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Audio system securitySecurity code.................................................234

Audio unit operationOn/off control...............................................235Sound button................................................235Waveband button........................................235Station tuning control................................235Station preset buttons..............................236Autostore control.........................................236Traffic information control.......................236

Audio unit menusAutomatic volume control.......................238Digital signal processing (DSP).............238News broadcasts.........................................238Alternative frequencies.............................238Regional mode (REG)................................239

Compact disc playerCompact disc playback............................240Track selection.............................................240Fast forward/reverse..................................240Shuffle/random...........................................240Repeat compact disc tracks...................240Compact disc track scanning..................241MP3 file playback.........................................241MP3 display options....................................241Ending compact disc playback..............242

Auxiliary input (AUX IN)socket

Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket.............243

Audio troubleshootingAudio troubleshooting...............................244

TelephoneGeneral Information...................................245

Bluetooth setup...........................................245Telephone setup..........................................245Telephone controls.....................................246Using the telephone...................................246

Voice controlPrinciple of Operation................................249Using voice control.....................................249Audio unit commands...............................250Telephone commands...............................257Climate control commands....................262

ConnectivityGeneral Information...................................265Connecting an external device...............266Connecting an external device - Vehicles

With: Bluetooth........................................266Using a USB device.....................................267Using an iPod................................................268

Navigation introductionGeneral Information...................................270Road Safety...................................................270

Navigation unit overviewNavigation unit overview...........................272Loading the navigation data....................276

Navigation Quick startNavigation Quick start................................277

System settingsSystem settings...........................................280

Navigation systemRoute options menu...................................283Route displays..............................................284

Traffic Message ChannelPrinciple of Operation................................285

5

Table of Contents

Page 8: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Using TMC......................................................285

Map updatesMap updates.................................................286

AppendicesType approvals.............................................287Type approvals.............................................287Type approvals.............................................287Type approvals.............................................288Type approvals.............................................288Type approvals.............................................289Electromagnetic compatibility..............289

6

Table of Contents

Page 9: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

ABOUT THIS MANUALThank you for choosing Ford. Werecommend that you take some time toget to know your vehicle by reading thismanual. The more that you know about it,the greater the safety and pleasure youwill get from driving it.

WARNINGAlways drive with due care andattention when using and operatingthe controls and features on your

vehicle.

Note: This manual describes productfeatures and options available throughoutthe range, sometimes even before they aregenerally available. It may describe optionsnot fitted to your vehicle.Note: Some of the illustrations in thismanual may be used for different models,so may appear different to your vehicle.However, the essential information in theillustrations is always correct.Note: Always use and operate your vehiclein line with all applicable laws andregulations.Note: Pass on this manual when sellingyour vehicle. It is an integral part of thevehicle.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARYSymbols in this handbook

WARNINGYou risk death or serious injury toyourself and others if you do notfollow the instructions highlighted

by the warning symbol.

CAUTIONYou risk damaging your vehicle if youdo not follow the instructionshighlighted by the caution symbol.

Symbols on your vehicle

When you see these symbols, read andfollow the relevant instructions in thishandbook before touching or attemptingadjustment of any kind.

PARTS AND ACCESSORIESNow you can be sure that your Fordparts are Ford partsYour Ford has been built to the higheststandards using high quality Ford OriginalParts. As a result, you can enjoy driving itfor many years.Should the unexpected occur and a majorpart needs replacing, we recommend thatyou accept nothing less than Ford OriginalParts.The use of Ford Original Parts ensures thatyour vehicle is repaired to its pre-accidentcondition and maintains its maximumresidual value.Ford Original Parts match Ford's stringentsafety requirements and high standardsof fit, finish and reliability. Quite simply,they represent the best overall repair value,including parts and labour costs.

7

Introduction

Page 10: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Now it is easier to tell if you have reallybeen given Ford Original Parts. The Fordlogo is clearly visible on the following partsif they are Ford Original Parts. If yourvehicle has to be repaired, look for theclearly visible Ford branding and make surethat only Ford Original Parts have beenused.

Look for the Ford logo on thefollowing partsSheet metal• Bonnet• Doors• Luggage compartment lid or tailgate

E132325

Bumper and radiator grille• Radiator grille• Front and rear bumper

E132326

Exterior mirror

E132340

Glass• Rear window• Side glass• Windscreen

8

Introduction

Page 11: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E132327

Lighting• Rear lamps• Headlamp

E132328

9

Introduction

Page 12: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Front exterior overview

E133220F E

H

A B

C

D

G

See Locking and Unlocking (page 32). See Keyless Entry (page 34).ASee Automatic Main Beam Control (page 48). See Driver Alert (page 154).See Lane Departure Warning (page 156). See Lane Keeping Aid (page 158).See Traffic Sign Recognition (page 160). See Active City Stop (page 162).

B

See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 45).CSee Maintenance (page 190).DSee Towing Points (page 188).E

10

At a Glance

Page 13: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

See Changing a Bulb (page 55).FTyre pressures. See Technical Specifications (page 218).GSee Changing a Road Wheel (page 208).H

Vehicle interior overview

E133222FG

I

H

A B C D

E

See Transmission (page 129).ASee Locking and Unlocking (page 32).BSee Power Windows (page 63). See Electric exterior mirrors (page 65).C

11

At a Glance

Page 14: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

See Head Restraints (page 106).DSee Fastening the seat belts (page 25).ESee Rear Seats (page 109).FSee Manual Seats (page 105). See Power Seats (page 108).GSee Parking Brake (page 132).HSee Opening and Closing the Bonnet (page 190).I

Instrument panel overviewLeft-hand drive

E132738

H IGFEDCBA

W V U T S R P O NQ KLM J

12

At a Glance

Page 15: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Right-hand drive

E132739

HI G B DC FE A

WRT SUVK QPN M LOJ

Air vents. See Air Vents (page 94).ADirection indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 52). Main beam. SeeLighting Control (page 47).

B

Left-hand drive vehicles with voice control - Information display control. SeeInformation Displays (page 75).

C

Left-hand drive vehicles without voice control - Information display control.See Information Displays (page 75).

C

Right-hand drive vehicles with voice control - Information and entertainmentdisplay control.

C

Right-hand drive vehicles without voice control - Information display control.See Information Displays (page 75).

C

13

At a Glance

Page 16: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Instrument cluster. See Gauges (page 69). See Warning Lamps andIndicators (page 71).

D

Left-hand drive vehicles with voice control - Information and entertainmentdisplay control.

E

Left-hand drive vehicles without voice control - Audio control. See AudioControl (page 41).

E

Right-hand drive vehicles with voice control - Information display control. SeeInformation Displays (page 75).

E

Right-hand drive vehicles without voice control - Audio control. See AudioControl (page 41).

E

Wiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 43).FInformation and entertainment display.GAudio unit. See Audio unit overview (page 228).HDoor lock button. See Locking and Unlocking (page 32).IHazard warning flasher switch. See Hazard Warning Flashers (page 51).JParking aid switch. See Parking Aids (page 136).KActive park assist switch. See Active Park Assist (page 143).LStart-stop switch. See Using start-stop (page 120).MHeated rear window switch. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 100).NHeated windscreen switch. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 100).OClimate controls. See Climate Control (page 94).PStart button. See Keyless Starting (page 116).QIgnition switch. See Ignition Switch (page 114).RAudio control. See Audio Control (page 41). Voice control. See Voice Control(page 42). Telephone control. See Telephone controls (page 246).

S

Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 41).THorn.UCruise control switches. See Using Cruise Control (page 146). Adaptive cruisecontrol (ACC) switches. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 150).Speed limiter switches. See Using the speed limiter (page 153).

V

Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 47). Front fog lamps. See FrontFog Lamps (page 50). Rear fog lamp. See Rear Fog Lamps (page 50).Headlamp levelling control. See Headlamp Levelling (page 51). Instrumentlighting dimmer. See Instrument Lighting Dimmer (page 111).

W

14

At a Glance

Page 17: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Rear exterior overview

E133221

D

EG

BA C

H F

See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 45).ASee Changing a Bulb (page 55).BSee Changing a Bulb (page 55).CSee Fuel filler flap (page 124).DSee Changing a Road Wheel (page 208).ETyre pressures. See Technical Specifications (page 218).F

15

At a Glance

Page 18: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

See Towing Points (page 188).GSee First Aid Kit (page 177). See Warning Triangle (page 177). See TyreRepair Kit (page 213). Spare wheel. See Changing a Road Wheel (page 208).Jack. See Changing a Road Wheel (page 208). Wheel brace. See Changinga Road Wheel (page 208). Towing eye. See Towing Points (page 188). Fuelfunnel. See Fuel filler flap (page 124).

H

16

At a Glance

Page 19: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

CHILD SEATS

E133140

E68916

WARNINGSSecure children that are less than150 centimetres (59 inches) tall in asuitable, approved child restraint, in

the rear seat.Extreme Hazard! Do not use arearward facing child restraint on aseat protected by an air bag in front

of it!Read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when you are fitting achild restraint.Do not modify child restraints in anyway.Do not hold a child on your lap whenthe vehicle is moving.

WARNINGSDo not leave unattended children inyour vehicle.If your vehicle has been involved inan accident, have the child restraintschecked by properly trained

technicians.

Note: Mandatory use of child restraintsvaries from country to country.Only child restraints certified toECE-R44.03 (or later) have been testedand approved for use in your vehicle. Achoice of these are available from yourDealer.

Child restraints for different massgroupsUse the correct child restraint as follows:

Baby safety seat

E68918

Secure children that weigh less than 13kilograms (29 pounds) in a rearward facingbaby safety seat (Group 0+) in the rearseat.

17

Child Safety

Page 20: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Child safety seat

E68920

Secure children that weigh between 13 and18 kilograms (29 and 40 pounds) in a childsafety seat (Group 1) in the rear seat.

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING

WARNINGSPlease consult your Dealer for thelatest details relating to Fordrecommended child seats.

WARNINGSExtreme Hazard! Do not use arearward facing child restraint on aseat protected by an air bag in front

of it!When using a child seat with asupport leg, the support leg mustrest securely on the floor.When using a child seat with a seatbelt, make sure that the seat belt isnot slack or twisted.

CAUTIONThe child seat must rest tightlyagainst the vehicle seat. It may benecessary to lift or remove the head

restraint. See Head Restraints (page 106).

Note: When using a child seat on a frontseat, always adjust the front passenger seatto its fully rearwards position. If it provesdifficult to tighten the lap section of the seatbelt without slack remaining, adjust theseatback to the fully upright position andraise the height of the seat. See Seats(page 105).

Mass group categories

Seating positions3210+0

22 - 36 kg(49 - 79

lbs)

15 - 25 kg(33 - 55

lbs)

9 - 18 kg(20 - 40

lbs)Up to 13 kg

(29 lbs)Up to 10 kg

(22 lbs)

UF¹UF¹UF¹XXFront passenger seatwith airbag ON

UUUUUFront passenger seatwith airbag OFF

UUUUURear seats

X Not suitable for children in this mass group.U Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group.

18

Child Safety

Page 21: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child restraints approved for use inthis mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a governmentapproved child restraint, in the rear seat.

ISOFIX child seats

Mass group categories

Seating positions10+

Forward facingRear facing

9 - 18 kg (20 - 40 lbs)Up to 13 kg (29 lbs)

Not ISOFIX equippedSize classFront seat

Seat type

A, B, B1, C, D1C, D, E1Size classRear outboard seat ISOFIX

IL, IUF3IL2Seat type

Not ISOFIX equippedSize classRear centre seat

Seat type

IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems of the semi-universal category.Please consult child restraints systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists.IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child restraints systems of universal categoryapproved for use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class.1The ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal child restraints systemsis defined by the capital letters A to G. These identification letters are displayed on ISOFIXchild restraints.2At time of publishing the recommended Group O+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the BritaxRoemer Baby Safe. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Fordrecommended child seats.3At time of publishing the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax RoemerDuo. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Ford recommended childseats.

19

Child Safety

Page 22: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

BOOSTER SEATS

WARNINGSDo not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with only the lapstrap of the seat belt.Do not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with a seat belt thatis slack or twisted.Do not put the seat belt under yourchild’s arm or behind its back.Do not use pillows, books or towelsto boost your child’s height.Make sure that your children sit in anupright position.Secure children that weigh morethan 15 kilograms (33 pounds) butare less than 150 centimetres (59

inches) tall in a booster seat or a boostercushion.

CAUTIONWhen using a child seat on a rear seat,make sure that the child seat reststightly against the vehicle seat. It may

be necessary to lift or remove the headrestraint. See Head Restraints (page 106).

Booster seat (Group 2)

E70710

We recommend that you use a boosterseat that combines a cushion with abackrest instead of a booster cushion only.The raised seating position will allow youto position the shoulder strap of the adultseat belt over the centre of your child’sshoulder and the lap strap tightly acrossits hips.

Booster cushion (Group 3)

E68924

20

Child Safety

Page 23: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

ISOFIX ANCHOR POINTS

WARNINGUse an anti-rotation device whenusing the ISOFIX system. Werecommend the use of a top tether

or support leg.

Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIXrestraint, make sure that you know thecorrect mass group and ISOFIX size classfor the intended seating locations. SeeChild Seat Positioning (page 18).Your vehicle is fitted with ISOFIX anchorpoints that accommodate universallyapproved ISOFIX child restraints.The ISOFIX system comprises of two rigidattachment arms on the child restraint thatattach to anchor points on the rear seats,where the cushion and backrest meet.Tether anchor points may also be fitted.

Top tether anchor points - allvehicles

E132902

Top tether anchor points - 4 doorvehicles

E132903

The tether anchor points are located undera flap.

Attaching a child seat with toptethers

WARNINGDo not attach a tether strap toanything other than the correcttether anchor point.

Note: Where applicable, remove theluggage cover to ease installation. SeeLuggage Covers (page 164).

WARNINGMake sure that the top tether strapis not slack or twisted and is properlylocated on the anchor point.

1. Route the tether strap to the anchorpoint.

21

Child Safety

Page 24: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E87145

2. Push the child seat back firmly toengage the ISOFIX lower anchor points.

3. Tighten the tether strap in line with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

WARNINGYou cannot open the doors frominside if you have put the child safetylocks on.

Manual child safety locksNote: On vehicles with keyless entry, usethe spare key. See Keyless Entry (page34).

E78298

Left-hand sideTurn anti-clockwise to lock and clockwiseto unlock.

Right-hand sideTurn clockwise to lock and anti-clockwiseto unlock.

Electric child safety locksNote: Pressing the switch will also disablethe rear electric window switches.

22

Child Safety

Page 25: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E124779

23

Child Safety

Page 26: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONAirbags

WARNINGSDo not modify the front of yourvehicle in any way. This couldadversely affect deployment of the

airbags.Extreme Hazard! Do not use arearward facing child restraint on aseat protected by an airbag in front

of it!Wear a seat belt and keep sufficientdistance between yourself and thesteering wheel. Only when you use

the seat belt properly, can it hold you in aposition that allows the airbag to achieveits optimum effect. See Sitting in theCorrect Position (page 105).

Have repairs to the steering wheel,steering column, seats, airbags andseat belts carried out by a properly

trained technician.Keep the areas in front of the airbagsfree from obstruction. Do not affixanything to or over the airbag covers.Do not poke sharp objects into areaswhere airbags are fitted. This coulddamage and adversely affect

deployment of the airbags.Use seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby a properly trained technician.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see acloud of harmless powdery residue if anairbag deploys. This is normal.Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a dampcloth.

Front airbags

E74302

The driver airbag, front passenger airbagand the front seat belt pretensioners willdeploy during significant frontal collisionsor collisions that are up to 30 degrees fromthe left or the right. The airbags will inflatewithin a few thousandths of a second anddeflate on contact with the occupants,thus cushioning forward body movement.During minor frontal collisions, overturns,rear collisions and side collisions, the driverand front passenger airbags will notdeploy.

Side and curtain airbagsDuring significant lateral collisions, onlythe airbags on the side affected by thecollision and the front seat beltpretensioners will deploy. The airbags willinflate within a few thousandths of asecond and deflate on contact with theoccupants, thus providing protection forthe body. The side and curtain airbags willnot deploy during minor lateral collisions,front collisions, rear collisions or overturns.

24

Occupant protection

Page 27: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Side airbags

E72658

Side airbags are fitted inside the seatbackof the front seats. A label indicates thatside airbags are fitted to your vehicle.

Curtain airbags

E75004

Curtain airbags are fitted inside the trimpanels over the front and rear sidewindows. Moulded badges in the B-pillartrim panels indicate that curtain airbagsare fitted to your vehicle.

Seat beltsWARNINGS

Wear a seat belt and keep sufficientdistance between yourself and thesteering wheel. Only when you use

the seat belt properly, can it hold you in aposition to achieve its optimum effect. SeeSitting in the Correct Position (page105).

WARNINGSNever use a seat belt for more thanone person.Use the correct buckle for each seatbelt.Do not use a seat belt that is slackor twisted.Do not wear thick clothing. The seatbelt must fit tightly around your bodyto achieve its optimum effect.Position the shoulder strap of theseat belt over the centre of yourshoulder and position the lap strap

tightly across your hips.

The driver and front passenger seat beltsystems are fitted with a seat beltpretensioner. Seat belt pretensioners havea lower deployment threshold than theairbags. During minor collisions, it ispossible that only the seat beltpretensioners will deploy.

Status after a collision

WARNINGSSeat belts subjected to strain, as aresult of an accident, should berenewed and the anchorages

checked by a properly trained technician.If a seat belt pretensioner has beendeployed the seat belt must berenewed.

FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNINGInsert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear a distinct click. You havenot fastened the seat belt properly

if you do not hear a click.

25

Occupant protection

Page 28: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E74124

E85817

Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if youpull it sharply or if the vehicle is on a slope.Press the red button on the buckle torelease the belt. Let it retract completelyand smoothly.

SEAT BELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT

E87511

Note: Lifting the slider slightly whilepressing the locking button makes it easierto release the locking mechanism.To raise or lower, press the locking buttonon the adjuster and move as necessary.

SEAT BELT REMINDER

WARNINGThe occupant protection system willonly provide optimum protectionwhen you use the seat belt properly.

The seat belt reminder warninglamp illuminates and an audiblewarning will sound if the driver's

or front seat passenger's seat belt has notbeen fastened and the vehicle exceeds arelatively low speed. It will also illuminateif the driver's or front seat passenger's seatbelt is unfastened when the vehicle ismoving. The audible warning will go offafter a few minutes but the seat beltreminder warning lamp will remain on untilthe driver's or front seat passenger's seatbelt is fastened.

26

Occupant protection

Page 29: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Rear seat belt reminderWARNING

If multiple belts are unfastenedwithin a few seconds of each other,only one audible chime will sound.

Note: Press the OK button on the steeringwheel control to confirm the message.A visual reminder of the seat belt statuswill be shown on the instrument displayonce the engine is started, and once againif any are unfastened when the vehicle ismoving.Fastened seat belts are indicated by a ticksymbol.If a belt is unfastened when the vehicle ismoving, the seat belt status screen will bedisplayed and the relevant seats will behighlighted by an exclamation mark. Anaudible chime will also sound.

Deactivating the seat beltreminderSee your dealer.

USING SEAT BELTS DURINGPREGNANCY

E68587

WARNINGPosition the seat belt correctly foryour safety and that of your unbornchild. Do not use only the lap strap

or the shoulder strap.

Position the lap strap comfortably acrossyour hips and low beneath your pregnantabdomen. Position the shoulder strapbetween your breasts, above and to theside of your pregnant abdomen.

DISABLING THE PASSENGERAIRBAG

WARNINGMake sure that the passenger airbagis disabled when using a rearwardfacing child restraint on the front

passenger seat.

E71313

Fitting the passenger airbagdeactivation switch

WARNINGIf you need to fit a child restraint ona seat protected by an operationalairbag in front of it, have a passenger

airbag deactivation switch fitted. Ask yourdealer for further information.

27

Occupant protection

Page 30: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: The key switch is located in the glovecompartment with an airbag deactivationlamp in the overhead console.If the airbag warning lamp illuminates orflashes when you are driving, this indicatesa malfunction. See Warning Lamps andIndicators (page 71). Remove the childrestraint and have the system checkedimmediately.

Disabling the passenger airbag

A BE71312

DisabledAEnabledB

Turn the switch to position A.When you switch the ignition on, check thatthe passenger airbag deactivation warninglamp illuminates.

Enabling the passenger airbagWARNING

Make sure that the passenger airbagis enabled when you are not using achild restraint on the front passenger

seat.

Turn the switch to position B.

28

Occupant protection

Page 31: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

GENERAL INFORMATION ONRADIO FREQUENCIES

CAUTIONSThe radio frequency used by yourremote control can also be used byother short distance radio

transmissions (e.g. amateur radios,medical equipment, wireless headphones,remote controls and alarm systems). If thefrequencies are jammed, you will not beable to use your remote control. You canlock and unlock the doors with the key.

Check your vehicle is locked beforeleaving it unattended. This willsafeguard against any potential

malicious frequency blocking.

Note: You could unlock the doors if youpress the buttons on the remote controlunintentionally.The operating range between your remotecontrol and your vehicle varies dependingon the environment.

PROGRAMMING THE REMOTECONTROLYou can programme a maximum of eightremote controls to use with your vehicle(including any supplied with your vehicle).

Programming a new remotecontrol1. Insert the key in the ignition.2. Cycle the key from position 0 to II and

then back to 0 four times within sixseconds.

3. Leave the key in position 0 and pressany button on the remote controlwithin 10 seconds. You will receiveconfirmation via a chime or LED thatprogramming has been successful.

Note: Further remote controls may beprogrammed at this stage.4. Press any button on each additional

remote control within 10 seconds ofeach other.

Reprogramming the unlockingfunctionNote: When you press the unlock buttoneither all the doors are unlocked or only thedriver’s door is unlocked. Pressing the unlockbutton again unlocks all the doors.Press and hold the unlock and lock buttonson the remote key simultaneously for atleast four seconds with the ignition off. Thedirection indicators will flash twice toconfirm the change.To return to the original unlocking function,repeat the process.

CHANGING THE REMOTECONTROL BATTERY

E107998

Make sure that you dispose ofold batteries in anenvironmentally friendly way.

Seek advice from your local authorityregarding recycling.

Remote control with a folding keyblade

E1288092

1

29

Keys and Remote Controls

Page 32: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

1. Insert a screwdriver in the positionshown and gently push the clip.

2. Press the clip down to release thebattery cover.

E128810

3. Carefully remove the cover.

E128811

4. Turn the remote control over to removethe battery.

5. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) withthe + facing upwards.

6. Replace the battery cover.

Remote control without a foldingkey blade

1

2

1

E87964

1. Press and hold the pushbuttons on theedges to release the cover. Carefullyremove the cover.

2. Remove the key blade.

E105362

3

3. Twist a flat bladed screwdriver in theposition shown to separate the twohalves of the remote control.

30

Keys and Remote Controls

Page 33: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E119190

4

4. Carefully insert the screwdriver in theposition shown to open the remotecontrol.

E125860

5

CAUTIONDo not touch the battery contacts orthe printed circuit board with thescrewdriver.

5. Carefully prise out the battery with thescrewdriver.

6. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) withthe + facing downwards.

7. Assemble the two halves of the remotecontrol.

8. Install the key blade.

31

Keys and Remote Controls

Page 34: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

CAUTIONCheck your vehicle is locked beforeleaving it unattended.

Note: Do not leave your keys in the vehicle.

LockingLocking with the keyTurn the top of the key towards the frontof the vehicle.

Locking with the remote controlNote: The driver’s door can be locked withthe key. This needs to be used if the remotecontrol is not functioning.Note: Your vehicle can be locked with a reardoor open. The door will be locked when itis closed.

Press the button.

Double lockingWARNING

Do not activate double locking whenpersons or animals are inside thevehicle. You will not be able to

unlock the doors from the inside if you havedouble locked them.

Note: If you double lock your vehicle whilstinside, switch the ignition on to return thedoor locks to a single locked state.Note: Your vehicle can be double lockedwith a rear door open. The door will bedouble locked when it is closed.Double locking is a theft protection featurethat prevents someone from opening thedoors from the inside.

Double locking with the keyTurn the key to the lock position twicewithin three seconds.

Double locking with the remote controlPress the button twice withinthree seconds.

UnlockingUnlocking with the keyTurn the top of the key towards the rear ofthe vehicle.

Unlocking with the remote controlNote: The driver’s door can be unlockedwith the key. This needs to be used if theremote control is not functioning.Note: If the vehicle remains locked forseveral weeks, the remote control will bedisabled. The vehicle must be unlocked andthe engine started using the key. Unlockingand starting the vehicle once will enable theremote control.

Press the button.

Automatic relockingThe doors will relock automatically if youdo not open a door, the luggagecompartment lid, or turn on the ignitionwithin 45 seconds of unlocking the doorswith the remote control. The doors lockand the alarm will return to its previousstate.

Reprogramming the unlocking functionThe unlocking function may bereprogrammed so that only the driver’sdoor is unlocked ( See Programming theremote control (page 29). ).

32

Locks

Page 35: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Locking and unlockingconfirmationNote: If your vehicle has double locking, thedirection indicators will flash once after youhave activated central locking, followed bytwo further flashes after double locking.When you lock the doors, the directionindicators will flash once.When you double lock the doors, thedirection indicators will flash three times.When you unlock the doors, the directionindicators will flash once.

Locking and unlocking the doorsfrom inside

E102566

Press the button. For itemlocation: See At a Glance (page10).

Luggage compartment lidOpening the luggage compartment lidwith the remote control

Press the button twice withinthree seconds.

Closing the luggage compartment lid

E133536

Locking the doors individually withthe keyNote: If the central locking function fails tooperate, the doors can be individually lockedusing the key in the position shown.

E112203

Left-hand sideTurn clockwise to lock.

Right-hand sideTurn anti-clockwise to lock.

UnlockingNote: If the child safety locks have alsobeen activated, pulling the internal lever willonly deactivate the emergency locking andnot the child safety lock. The doors can onlybe opened using the external door handle.Note: If the doors have been unlocked usingthis method, the doors must be lockedindividually until the central locking functionhas been repaired.Unlock the driver's door using the key. Theother doors can be unlocked individuallyby pulling the interior door handles onthose doors.

33

Locks

Page 36: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

KEYLESS ENTRYGeneral information

WARNINGThe keyless entry system may notfunction if the key is close to metalobjects or electronic devices such as

mobile phones.

The passive entry system will not functionif:• The vehicle battery is flat.• The passive key frequencies are

jammed.• The passive key battery is flat.Note: If the passive entry system does notfunction, you will need to use the key bladeto lock and unlock your vehicle.The keyless system allows the driver tooperate the vehicle without the use of akey or remote control.

E78276

Passive locking and unlocking requires avalid passive key to be located within oneof the three external detection ranges.These are located approximately one anda half metres from the driver and frontpassenger door handles and the luggagecompartment lid.

Passive keyThe vehicle can be locked and unlockedwith the passive key. The passive key canalso be used as a remote control. SeeLocking and Unlocking (page 32).

Locking the vehicleWARNING

The vehicle does not lock itselfautomatically. If the locking functionis not activated, the vehicle will

remain unlocked.

Note: The ignition will automatically switchoff when you lock your vehicle from theoutside. This is to prevent the vehicle batteryfrom discharging.Note: Do not grab the door handle.

E87384

Touch a front door handle lock sensor tolock the vehicle.To activate central locking and arm thealarm:• Touch a front door handle lock sensor

once.To activate double locking and arm thealarm:• Touch a front door handle lock sensor

twice within three seconds.Note: There must be clearance betweeneach touch of the door handle.

34

Locks

Page 37: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: Once activated, the vehicle willremain locked for approximately threeseconds. When the delay period is over, thedoors can be opened again, provided thepassive key is within the respectivedetection range.Two short flashes of the directionindicators confirms that all the doors andthe luggage compartment lid have beenlocked and that the alarm has been armed.

Luggage compartment lidNote: The luggage compartment lid cannotbe closed and, will pop back up if thepassive key is located inside the vehicle withthe doors locked.Note: If a second valid passive key islocated within the rear exterior detectionrange, the luggage compartment lid can beclosed.

Unlocking the vehicleNote: If the vehicle remains locked forlonger than three days, the keyless systemwill enter an energy-saving mode. This is toreduce the discharge of the vehicle battery.When the vehicle is unlocked while in thismode, the reaction time of the system maybe a little longer than normal. Unlocking thevehicle once will deactivate theenergy-saving mode.Note: If the vehicle remains locked forseveral weeks, the keyless system will bedisabled. The vehicle must be unlockedusing the key blade. Unlocking the vehicleonce will enable the keyless system.Note: Do not touch the front door handlelock sensor when opening a door.

E78278

Open any door.Note: A valid passive key must be locatedwithin the detection range of that door.One long flash of the direction indicatorsconfirms that all the doors and the luggagecompartment lid have been unlocked andthat the alarm has been disarmed.

Unlocking only the driver's doorIf the unlocking function is reprogrammedso that only the driver’s door and theluggage compartment lid are unlocked (See Programming the remote control(page 29). ), note the following:If the driver’s door is the first door which isopened, the other doors will remain locked.All the other doors can be unlocked frominside the vehicle by pressing the unlockbutton on the instrument panel. For itemlocation: See At a Glance (page 10).Doors can be unlocked individually bypulling the interior door handles on thosedoors.

Disabled keysAny keys left inside the vehicle interiorwhen it is locked will be disabled.A disabled key cannot be used to turn theignition on or start the engine.

35

Locks

Page 38: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

In order to use these passive keys again,they have to be enabled.To enable all your passive keys, unlock thevehicle using a passive key or the remotecontrol unlocking function.All passive keys will then be enabled if theignition is turned on or the vehicle is startedusing a valid key.

Locking and unlocking the doorswith the key blade

1

2

1

E87964

1. Carefully remove the cover.2. Remove the key blade and insert it into

the lock.Note: Only the driver's door handle is fittedwith a lock cylinder.

GLOBAL OPENING ANDCLOSINGYou can also operate the electric windowswith the ignition off via the global openingand global closing function.Note: Global closing will only operate if youhave set the memory correctly for eachwindow. See Power Windows (page 63).

Global opening

E71955

To open all the windows, press and holdthe remote control unlock button for atleast three seconds. Press the lock orunlock button to stop the opening function.

Global closingVehicles without keyless entry

WARNINGTake care when using global closing.In an emergency, press the lock orunlock button immediately to stop.

E71956

36

Locks

Page 39: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

To close all the windows, press and holdthe remote control lock button for at leastthree seconds. Press the lock or unlockbutton to stop the closing function. Theanti-trap function is also active duringglobal closing.

Vehicles with keyless entry

E87384

WARNINGTake care when using global closing.In an emergency, touch a doorhandle lock sensor to stop.

Note: Global closing can be activated usingthe driver’s door handle. Global opening andclosing can also be activated using thebuttons on the passive key.To close all the windows, press and holdthe driver’s door handle for at least twoseconds. The anti-trap function is alsoactive during global closing.

37

Locks

Page 40: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe engine immobiliser is a theft protectionsystem that prevents someone fromstarting the engine with an incorrectlycoded key.

CODED KEYSNote: Do not shield your keys with metalobjects. This may prevent the receiver fromrecognising your key as a valid one.Note: Have all of your remaining keyserased and recoded if you lose a key. Askyour dealer for further information. Havereplacement keys recoded together withyour existing keys.If you lose a key, you can obtain areplacement from your Ford Dealer. Ifpossible, provide them with the keynumber from the tag provided with theoriginal keys. You can also obtainadditional keys from your Ford Dealer.

ARMING THE ENGINEIMMOBILISERThe engine immobiliser is armedautomatically a short time after you haveswitched the ignition off.

DISARMING THE ENGINEIMMOBILISERThe engine immobiliser is disarmedautomatically when you switch the ignitionon with a correctly coded key.

38

Engine immobiliser

Page 41: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONAlarm systemYour vehicle may be equipped with one ofthe following alarm systems:• Perimeter alarm.• Perimeter alarm with interior sensors.• Category one alarm with interior

sensors and battery back-up sounder.

Perimeter alarmThe perimeter alarm is a deterrent againstunauthorised access to your vehiclethrough the doors and the bonnet. It alsoprotects the audio unit.

Interior sensors

E129005

WARNINGThe sensors in the interior lamp unitmust not be covered up. Do notactivate the alarm with full guard if

any persons, animals or other movingobjects are inside the vehicle.

The sensors act as a deterrent againstunauthorised intrusion by sensing anymovement within the vehicle.

Battery back-up sounderThe battery back-up sounder is an extraalarm system which will sound a sirenwhen the alarm is triggered. It is armeddirectly when you lock the vehicle. Thesounder has its own battery and will soundan alarm siren even if someonedisconnects the vehicle battery or thebattery back-up sounder itself.

Triggering the alarmOnce armed, the alarm is triggered in anyof the following ways:• If someone opens a door, the tailgate

or the bonnet without a valid key orremote control.

• If someone removes the audio ornavigation system.

• If the ignition is turned to position I, IIor III without a valid key.

• If the interior sensors detect movementwithin the vehicle.

• On vehicles with a battery back-upsounder, if someone disconnects thevehicle battery or the battery back-upsounder itself.

If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn willsound for 30 seconds and the hazardwarning flasher will flash for five minutes.Any further attempts to perform one of theabove will trigger the alarm again.

Full and reduced guardFull guardFull guard is the standard setting.In full guard, the interior sensors areactivated when you arm the alarm.Note: This may result in false alarms ifanimals or moving objects are inside thevehicle.

39

Alarm

Page 42: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: False alarms can also be triggeredby the auxiliary heater See Auxiliary Heater(page 102). If you are using the auxiliaryheater, direct the air flow towards thefootwell.

Reduced guardIn reduced guard, the interior sensors aredeactivated when you arm the alarm.Note: You can set the alarm to reducedguard for the current ignition cycle only. Thenext time you switch on the ignition, thealarm will be reset to full guard.

Ask on ExitYou can set the information display to askyou each time which level of guard youwish to set.If you select Ask on Exit, the messageReduced guard? appears in theinstrument cluster display each time youswitch the ignition off.If you wish to arm the alarm with reducedguard, press the OK button when thismessage appears.If you wish to arm the alarm with full guard,leave the vehicle without pressing the OKbutton.

Selecting full or reduced guardNote: Selecting Reduced does not set thealarm permanently to reduced guard. It setsit to reduced guard only for the currentignition cycle. If you regularly set the alarmto reduced guard, select Ask on Exit.You can select full or reduced guard usingthe information display. See GeneralInformation (page 75).

Information messagesSee Information Messages (page 83).

ARMING THE ALARMTo arm the alarm, lock the vehicle. SeeLocks (page 32).

DISARMING THE ALARMVehicles without keyless entryPerimeter alarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors with the key and switching theignition on with a correctly coded key, orunlocking the doors or the luggagecompartment lid with the remote control.

Category one alarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors with the key and switching theignition on with a correctly coded keywithin 12 seconds, or unlocking the doorsor the luggage compartment lid with theremote control.

Vehicles with keyless entryNote: A valid passive key must be locatedwithin the detection range of that door forkeyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 34).

Perimeter alarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors and switching the ignition on, orunlocking the doors or the luggagecompartment lid with the remote control.

Category one alarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors and switching the ignition onwithin 12 seconds, or unlocking the doorsor the luggage compartment lid with theremote control.

40

Alarm

Page 43: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEEL

WARNINGNever adjust the steering wheelwhen the vehicle is moving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in thecorrect position. See Sitting in the CorrectPosition (page 105).

1

2

2

E95178

3E95179

WARNINGMake sure that you fully engage thelocking lever when returning it to itsoriginal position.

AUDIO CONTROLSelect the required source on the audiounit.The following functions can be operatedwith the remote control:

Type 1

E129462

BD

C

AE

Volume upASeek up or nextBVolume downCSeek down or previousDModeE

Press the mode button to select the audiosource.

41

Steering Wheel

Page 44: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Type 2

E129463

C

D

A

B

Volume upASeek up or nextBVolume downCSeek down or previousD

Seek, next or previousPress the seek button to:• tune the radio to the next or previous

stored preset• play the next or the previous track.Press and hold the seek button to:• tune the radio to the next station up or

down the frequency band• seek through a track.

VOICE CONTROL

E129464

Pull the button to select or deselect voicecontrol. See Voice control (page 249).

42

Steering Wheel

Page 45: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

WINDSCREEN WIPERS

E128444

A

C

D

B

Single wipeAIntermittent wipe or autowipersBNormal wipeCHigh speed wipeD

Intermittent wipe

C

A B

E128445

Short wipe intervalAIntermittent wipeBLong wipe intervalC

The rotary control can be used to adjustthe intermittent wipe interval.

Automatic wiper systemSome models without autowipers arefitted with a speed-dependent front screenwiper system.When the vehicle is slowed to walkingspeed or is brought to a standstill, thewiper speed will automatically switch tothe next lower wiper speed setting.When the vehicle speed is increased, thewiper speed will return to themanually-chosen setting.Moving the wiper lever when the system isoperating will switch off the system.If the vehicle is again slowed to walkingspeed or is brought to a standstill, thesystem is reactivated.

AUTOWIPERS

CAUTIONSDo not switch autowipers on in dryweather conditions. The rain sensoris very sensitive and the wipers may

operate if dirt, mist or flies hit thewindscreen.

Replace the wiper blades as soon asthey begin to leave bands of waterand smears. If you do not replace

them, the rain sensor will continue todetect water on the windscreen and thewipers will operate, even though themajority of the windscreen is dry.

Fully defrost the windscreen in icyconditions before you switchautowipers on.Switch autowipers off before youenter a car wash.

Note: If autolamps have been switched onin conjunction with autowipers, dippedheadlamps will illuminate automaticallywhen the rain sensor activates thewindscreen wipers continuously.

43

Wipers and Washers

Page 46: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

C

A B

E128445

High sensitivityAOnBLow sensitivityC

If you switch autowipers on, the wipers willnot cycle until water is detected on thewindscreen. The rain sensor will thencontinuously measure the amount of wateron the windscreen and adjust the speedof the wipers automatically.Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensorusing the rotary control. With lowsensitivity, the wipers will operate whenthe sensor detects a lot of water on thewindscreen. With high sensitivity, thewipers will operate if the sensor detects asmall amount of water on the windscreen.

WINDSCREEN WASHERS

E129188

WARNINGDo not operate the washer for morethan 10 seconds at a time, and neverwhen the reservoir is empty.

Whilst the lever is pulled towards thesteering wheel the washer will work inconjunction with the wipers.After releasing the lever, the wipersoperate for a short time.

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHERSIntermittent wipe

E129193

A B

Intermittent wipeALow speed wipeB

Press the button at the end of the lever tochange between off, intermittent and lowspeed.

44

Wipers and Washers

Page 47: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Reverse gear wipeThe rear wiper will be activatedautomatically when selecting reverse gearif the rear wiper is not already switched onand the front wiper is operating.

Rear window washer

E129194

WARNINGDo not operate the washer for morethan 10 seconds at a time, and neverwhen the reservoir is empty.

While the lever is pushed away from thesteering wheel the washer will work inconjunction with the wipers.After releasing the lever, the wipersoperate for a short time.

HEADLAMP WASHERSThe headlamp washers will operate withthe windscreen washers when theheadlamps are on.Note: To stop the washer fluid reservoiremptying quickly, the headlamp washerswill not operate every time that you use thewindscreen washers.

CHECKING THE WIPERBLADES

E66644

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge ofthe blade to check for roughness.Clean the wiper blade lips with waterapplied with a soft sponge.

CHANGING THE WIPERBLADESWindscreen wiper blades

CAUTIONSSet the windscreen wipers in theservice position to change the wiperblades.You can use the service position inwinter to provide easier access to thewiper blades for freeing them from

snow and ice. The windscreen wipers willreturn to their normal position as soon asyou switch on the ignition so make surethat the outside of the windscreen is freefrom snow and ice before you switch onthe ignition.

45

Wipers and Washers

Page 48: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Service position

E75184

E129986A

Switch off the ignition and move the wiperlever to position A within three seconds.Release the lever when the windscreenwipers have moved to the service position.

Changing the windscreen wiper bladesSet the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition and lift the wiper arms.

E728991

2

Install in the reverse order.Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.

Rear window wiper blade1. Lift the wiper arm.

2

3

4

E86456

2. Position the wiper blade at right anglesto the wiper arm.

3. Disengage the wiper blade from thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.5. Install in the reverse order.

46

Wipers and Washers

Page 49: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

LIGHTING CONTROLLighting control positions

E132706

A CB

OffASide and tail lampsBHeadlampsC

Parking lampsWARNING

Prolonged use of the parking lampswill discharge the battery.

Switch off the ignition.

Both sidesTurn the lighting control switch to positionB.

One side

E130139

A

B

Right-hand sideALeft-hand sideB

Main and dipped beam

E130140

Push the lever forward to switch betweenmain and dipped beam.

Headlamp flasherPull the lever slightly towards the steeringwheel.

47

Lighting

Page 50: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Home safe lightingSwitch the ignition off and pull thedirection indicator lever towards thesteering wheel to switch the headlampson. You will hear a short tone. Theheadlamps will go off automatically afterthree minutes with any door open, or 30seconds after the last door has beenclosed.The home safe lights can be cancelled byeither pulling the direction indicator levertowards the steering wheel again or byturning the ignition switch ON.

AUTOLAMPS

WARNINGIn severe weather conditions, it maybe necessary to switch yourheadlamps on manually.

Note: If you have switched autolamps on,you can only switch the main beam on whenautolamps has switched the headlamps on.Note: If autolamps have been switched onin conjunction with autowipers, dippedheadlamps will illuminate automaticallywhen the rain sensor activates thewindscreen wipers continuously.

E132707

The headlamps will come on and go offautomatically depending on the ambientlight.The headlamps will remain on for a periodof time after you switch the ignition off.You can adjust the time delay using theinformation display. See InformationDisplays (page 75).

AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAMCONTROL

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention. A manual

override may be necessary if the systemfails to switch the main beam on or off.

A manual override may be requiredwhen approaching other road userssuch as cyclists.Do not use the system in fog.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weather conditionsthe system may not function. Amanual override may be necessary in

these cases.Reflective road signs may be detectedas oncoming traffic and theheadlamps may be switched to

dipped beam.If the lights of oncoming vehicles arehidden by obstacles (for exampleguard rails) the system may not

deactivate the main beam.Always fit Ford Original Parts whenreplacing headlamp bulbs. Otherbulbs may reduce system

performance.

48

Lighting

Page 51: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

CAUTIONSCheck and replace wiper bladesregularly to ensure the camera sensorhas a clear view through the

windscreen. Replacement wiper bladesmust be the correct length.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings, insectsand snow or ice.The system will automatically switch onmain beam if it is dark enough and no othertraffic is present. If it detects anapproaching vehicle’s headlamps or taillamps, or street lighting ahead the systemwill switch off main beam before it candistract other road users. Dipped beamswill remain on.A camera sensor is centrally mountedbehind the windscreen of the vehicle, andmonitors conditions continuously to decidewhen to switch the main beam off and on.Once the system is active the main beamwill switch on if:• It is dark enough to require the use of

main beams and• there is no traffic or street lighting

ahead and• vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h

(25 mph).The main beam will switch off if:• The ambient light is high enough that

main beam is not required.• An approaching vehicle's headlamps

or tail lamps are detected.• Street lighting is detected.• Vehicle speed falls below 25 km/h (16

mph).• The camera sensor is too hot or

becomes blocked.

Activating the systemSwitch on the system using the informationdisplay and autolamps. See InformationDisplays (page 75). See Autolamps(page 48).

E132707

Turn the switch to the autolamps position.Note: The system may take a short time toinitialise after first switching the ignition on,especially in very dark conditions. The mainbeam will not automatically switch onduring this period.

Setting the system sensitivityThe system has three sensitivity levelswhich can be accessed via the informationdisplay. See Information Displays (page75).The sensitivity determines the speed atwhich the main beam will be restored afterdetected traffic leaves the field of view.

49

Lighting

Page 52: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Manually overriding the system

E133632

Push or pull the lever to switch betweenmain and dipped beam.Note: This is a temporary override and thesystem will return to automatic operationafter a short period.To permanently deactivate the system usethe information display menu or turn thelighting control switch from autolamps toheadlamps.

FRONT FOG LAMPS

WARNINGOnly use the front fog lamps whenvisibility is considerably restricted byfog, snow or rain.

E132709

REAR FOG LAMPS

WARNINGSOnly use the rear fog lamps whenvisibility is restricted to less than 50metres (164 feet).Do not use the rear fog lamps whenit is raining or snowing and visibilityis more than 50 metres (164 feet).

E132710

50

Lighting

Page 53: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS- VEHICLES WITH: ADAPTIVEFRONT LIGHTING/XENONHEADLAMPSTo adjust the headlamps for driving on theleft or right hand side of the road, see yourdealer.

HEADLAMP LEVELLINGNote: Vehicles with Xenon headlamps areequipped with automatic headlamplevelling.1. Press to release the pop out button.

E132711

1

2

2

2. Rotate the button to the requiredsetting.

3. Push the button to the closed position.You can adjust the level of the headlampbeams according to the vehicle load.

Recommended headlamp levelling switch positions

Switch positionLoad in luggagecompartment

Load

Second row seatsFront seats

0--1-2

1-32

2Max132

3Max1-1

1 See Vehicle identification (page 221).

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

E71943

For item location: See At a Glance (page10).

51

Lighting

Page 54: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E130141

Note: Tap the lever up or down to make thedirection indicators flash only three times.

CORNERING LAMPS

E72898

B

A

B

A

Headlamp beamACornering lamp beamB

52

Lighting

Page 55: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

The cornering lamps illuminate the insideof a corner when you are turning.

INTERIOR LAMPSInterior lightingNote: Individual lamps may be switched onindependently, but not off if all lamps havebeen switched on by the driver.Note: All other lamps will be eithernon-switchable or with individual readingor dome lamp functionality only.The lamps will come on when you unlockor open a door or the luggagecompartment lid. If you leave a door openwith the ignition switch off, all lamps willgo off automatically after some time toprevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch them back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.

Side mounted lamp

BCE139419

A

Reading lamp on and off switchADoor function switchBAll lamps on and off switchC

If you press switch B all lamps remain offwhen the door is opened. Press the switchagain to reverse.You can control all lamps using switch C.

Centre mounted lamp

E139420CD

A B

Right-hand side reading lamp onand off switch

A

Left-hand side reading lamp onand off switch

B

Door function switchCAll lamps on and off switchD

If you press switch C all lamps remain offwhen the door is opened. Press the switchagain to reverse.You can control all lamps using switch D.

Ambient lightingIf you leave a door open with the ignitionswitch off, the ambient lamp will go offautomatically after some time to preventthe vehicle battery from discharging.If dark, the ambient lights are active if theignition and headlamps are switched on.

53

Lighting

Page 56: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Type 1Ambient lighting illuminates several areas,for example footwells, cup holders anddoors with a single colour and can beswitched on and off using the informationdisplay menu. See General Information(page 75).Use the instrument lighting dimmerswitches to adjust to the desiredbrightness. See Instrument LightingDimmer (page 111).

Type 2

E133092

Ambient lighting illuminates several areas,for example footwells, cup holders anddoors with a choice of several colours. Theambient lighting control switch is locatedin the overhead console.To activate, rotate the control knob andadjust to the desired brightness. Use theleft switch to cycle through the colourchoices. Use the right switch to activateall ambient light areas and interior lamps.

REMOVING A HEADLAMP

WARNINGHave Xenon bulbs changed by atrained technician. There is a risk ofelectric shock.

1. Open the bonnet. See Opening andClosing the Bonnet (page 190).

E133215

2

2

4

3

2. Remove the screws.3. Pull the headlamp as far as possible

towards the front of the vehicle todisengage it from the lower fixing point.

4. Lift the outer side of the headlamp andremove it.

E133750

5

5. Disconnect the electrical connector.

54

Lighting

Page 57: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: When fitting the headlamp, makesure that you reconnect the electricalconnector properly.Note: When fitting the headlamp, makesure that you fully engage the headlamp inthe lower fixing point.Note: When fitting the headlamp, makesure that the screw is located in theheadlamp moulding before you install it.

CHANGING A BULB

WARNINGSSwitch the lights and the ignition off.

Let the bulb cool down beforeremoving it.Have Xenon bulbs changed by aproperly trained technician. There isa risk of electric shock.

CAUTIONSDo not touch the glass of the bulb.

Only fit bulbs of the correctspecification. See BulbSpecification Chart (page 62).

Note: The following instructions describehow to remove the bulbs. Fit replacementsin the reverse order unless otherwise stated.

HeadlampNote: Remove the covers to gain access tothe bulbs.

E133102

A B C D

Side lampAHeadlamp dipped beamBHeadlamp main beamCDirection indicatorD

Direction indicator1. Remove the headlamp. See

Removing a Headlamp (page 54).

E1331042

3

2. Remove the cover.3. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise

and remove it.4. Gently press the bulb into the bulb

holder, turn it anti-clockwise andremove it.

55

Lighting

Page 58: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Headlamp main beam

CAUTIONDo not touch the glass of the bulb.

1. Remove the headlamp. SeeRemoving a Headlamp (page 54).

E133105

2 4

2. Remove the cover.3. Disconnect the electrical connector.4. Release the clip and remove the bulb.

Headlamp dipped beam

CAUTIONDo not touch the glass of the bulb.

1. Remove the headlamp. SeeRemoving a Headlamp (page 54).

E133106

2 4

2. Remove the cover.3. Disconnect the electrical connector.4. Release the clip and remove the bulb.

Side Lamp1. Remove the headlamp. See

Removing a Headlamp (page 54).

E1331032

3

2. Remove the cover.3. Remove the bulb holder.4. Remove the bulb.

56

Lighting

Page 59: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Side repeater

E133426

1

1. Carefully remove the cover.

E133427

2. Using a suitable implement release theretaining clip.

E133108

3. Carefully remove the side repeater.

E133109

4. Remove the bulb holder.5. Remove the bulb.

Approach lampCAUTION

When removing the mirror glass, takecare not to break it.

Note: Position the mirror glass as farinwards as possible.

E133110

57

Lighting

Page 60: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

1. Insert your fingers into the gap betweenthe mirror housing and the mirror glassand pull gently to remove the mirrorglass.

E133717

2

2. Remove the lamp.

E133718 33. Remove the bulb.

Front fog lamps1. Remove the headlamp. See

Removing a Headlamp (page 54).

2

E133107

3

Note: You cannot separate the fog lampbulb from the bulb holder.2. Disconnect the electrical connector.3. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise

and remove it.

Rear lamps - 5 door

E133111

1. Remove the trim panel.

58

Lighting

Page 61: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E133112

2

2. Remove the wing nuts and detach theclip.

3. Remove the lamp.

E133127

4

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

E133113D

B

C

A

5. Remove the bulb holder.6. Gently press the bulb into the bulb

holder, turn it anti-clockwise andremove it.

A. Brake lampB. Reversing lampC. Tail and fog lampD. Direction indicator

Rear lamps - 4 doorDirection indicator, tail and fog lamp

E133702

1. Remove the trim panel.

59

Lighting

Page 62: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

2

E133703

2. Remove the wing nuts and detach theclip.

3. Remove the lamp.

E133713

4

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

A

B

E133714

5. Remove the bulb holder.

6. Gently press the bulb into the bulbholder, turn it anti-clockwise andremove it.

A. Tail and fog lampB. Direction indicator

Brake and reversing lamp1. Open the luggage compartment lid.

x10 2

E133724

2. Remove the luggage compartment lidtrim.

3

E133725

CAUTIONUnclip the outboard side first.

60

Lighting

Page 63: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

3. Remove the wing nut and detach the2 clips.

4. Remove the lamp.

5E133726

5. Disconnect the electrical connector.

E133727

A

B

6. Remove the bulb holder.7. Gently press the bulb into the bulb

holder, turn it anti-clockwise andremove it.

A. Brake lampB. Reversing lamp

Central high mounted brake lampNote: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

Number plate lampNote: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

Interior lampsVehicles with LED lampsNote: The LED board is not a serviceableitem, please consult your dealer if this fails.

E125092

Luggage compartment lamp,footwell lamp and tailgate lamp

E72784

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.2. Remove the bulb.

61

Lighting

Page 64: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART

Power (watt)SpecificationLamp

21PY21WFront direction indicator

55H1Headlamp main beam

551H7Headlamp dipped beam

55H1Cornering lamp

55H11Front fog lamp

5W5WSide lamp

5WY5WSide repeater

5W5WApproach lamp

21PY21WRear direction indicator

21/5P21/5WBrake and tail lamp

5W5WTail lamp

21P21WRear fog lamp

16W16WReversing lamp

5W5WLuggage compartment lamp1Fit a replacement with the same rating as the one you have removed.

62

Lighting

Page 65: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

POWER WINDOWS

WARNINGDo not operate the electric windowsunless they are free from obstruction.

Note: If you operate the switches oftenduring a short period of time, the systemmight become inoperable for a certain timeto prevent damage due to overheating.Switch on the ignition to operate theelectric windows.

Global opening and closingYou can also operate the electric windowswith the ignition off via the global openingand closing function. See Locks (page32).

Driver's door switchesYou can operate all the windows with theswitches on the door trim panel of thedriver’s door.

E70848

Opening and closing the windowsautomaticallyPress or lift the switch to the second actionpoint and release it completely. Press orlift it again to stop the windows.

Safety switch for rear windowsWARNING

On some vehicles, pressing theswitch will also lock the rear doorsfrom inside. See Child Safety

Locks (page 22).

Note: You can always operate the rearwindows from the driver’s door.

E70850

A switch in the driver’s door disables therear electric window switches.The light in the switch comes on and thelights in the rear window switches go offwhen the rear windows are disabled.

Anti-trap functionWARNING

Careless closing of the windows canoverride the protection function andcause injuries.

63

Windows and Mirrors

Page 66: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

The electric windows will stopautomatically while closing and reversesome distance if there is an obstacle in theway.

Overriding the anti-trap function

WARNINGWhile you close the window for thethird time, the anti-trap function isdisabled. Make sure there are no

obstacles in the way of the closing window.

To override this protection function whenthere is a resistance, e.g. in the winter,proceed as follows:1. Close the window twice until it reaches

the resistance and let it reverse.2. Close the window a third time to the

resistance. The anti-trap function isdisabled and you cannot close thewindow automatically. The windowwill override the resistance and you canclose it fully.

3. If the window does not close after thethird attempt, have it checked by anexpert.

Resetting the memory of theelectric windows

WARNINGThe anti-trap function is deactivateduntil you have reset the memory.

After the battery has been disconnectedfrom the vehicle you must reset thememory separately for each window:Note: On vehicles with a convertible top,the roof and doors must be fully closedbefore carrying out the following procedure.1. Lift and hold the switch until the

window is fully closed.2. Release the switch.

3. Lift the switch again for one moresecond.

4. Push and hold the switch until thewindow is fully open.

5. Release the switch.6. Lift and hold the switch until the

window is fully closed.7. Open the window and try to close it

automatically.8. Reset and repeat procedure if the

window does not close automatically.

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

WARNINGDo not overestimate the distance ofthe objects that you see in theconvex mirror. Objects seen in

convex mirrors will appear smaller andfurther away than they actually are.

Manual folding mirrorsFoldingPush the mirror towards the door windowglass.

UnfoldingMake sure that you fully engage the mirrorin its support when returning it to itsoriginal position.

64

Windows and Mirrors

Page 67: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

ELECTRIC EXTERIORMIRRORS

A CB

E70846

Left-hand mirrorAOffBRight-hand mirrorC

Mirror tilting positions

E70847

The electric exterior mirrors are fitted witha heating element that will defrost ordemist the mirror glass. See HeatedWindows and Mirrors (page 100).

Electric folding mirrorsAutomatic folding and unfoldingNote: If the mirrors have been folded usingthe manual fold button they can only beunfolded using the manual fold button.The mirrors will fold automatically whenyou lock the vehicle with the key, theremote control or a keyless entry systemrequest. The mirrors will unfold when youunlock the vehicle with the key, the remotecontrol, a keyless entry system request,the driver's interior door handle or startingthe engine.

Manual folding and unfoldingThe electric folding mirrors operate withthe ignition on.Note: You can operate the mirrors (mirrortilting and folding) for several minutes afteryou switch off the ignition. They will bedeactivated as soon as a door is opened.

E72623

Press the button to fold or unfold themirrors.

65

Windows and Mirrors

Page 68: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

If you press the switch again while themirrors are moving, they will stop andreverse the direction of movement.Note: When the mirrors are operated oftenduring a short period of time, the systemmay become inoperable for a period of timeto prevent damage due to overheating.

AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR

E71028

The auto-dimming mirror will adjustautomatically when hit by glaring lightfrom behind. It will not work when you haveselected reverse gear.

BLIND SPOT MONITORBlind spot information system(BLIS)

WARNINGSThe system is not designed toprevent contact with other vehiclesor objects. The system only provides

a warning to assist you in detectingvehicles in the blind spot zones. Thesystem will not detect obstacles,pedestrians, motorcyclists or cyclists.

Do not use the system as areplacement for using the side andrear view mirrors, and looking over

your shoulder before changing lanes. Thesystem is not a replacement for carefuldriving and is only to be used as an aid.

The system is a convenience feature thataids the driver in detecting vehicles thatmay have entered the blind spot zone (A).The detection area is on both sides of thevehicle extending rearwards from theexterior mirrors to approximately 3 metres(10 feet) beyond the bumper. The systemwill alert you if certain vehicles enter theblind spot zone whilst driving.

A

A

E124788

Using the systemThe system displays a yellow indicatorlocated in the exterior mirrors.

E124736

Note: Both indicators will illuminate brieflywhen you switch the ignition on to confirmthat the system is operational.

66

Windows and Mirrors

Page 69: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: On vehicles with automatictransmission, the system is active only in S,D and N.The system is only active when you exceed10 km/h (6 mph). The system istemporarily deactivated when you selectreverse gear.

System detection and alertsThe system will trigger the alert for vehiclesthat enter the blind spot zone from the rearor merge from the side. Vehicles that youpass, or vehicles that enter the blind spotzone from the front, will only trigger thealert after the vehicle has remained in theblind spot zone for a short period of time.Note: Vehicles that pass through the blindzone quickly (typically less than 2 seconds)will not trigger the alert.The system consists of two radar sensorseach located behind the rear wheelshidden behind the bumpers.

CAUTIONSDo not place items such as bumperstickers in this area.Repairs to these areas using body fillerwill affect the performance of thesystem.

E124741

Detection limitationsThere may be certain instances wherevehicles entering and exiting the blind spotzones may not be detected.Instances which may cause non-detection:• Debris build up on the rear bumper

panels in the area of the sensors.• Certain manoeuvring of vehicles

entering and exiting the blind zone.• Vehicles passing through the blind zone

at high speed.• Severe weather conditions.• Several vehicles passing through the

blind zone following each other closely.

False alertsNote: False alerts are temporary and willself correct.There may be certain instances when thesystem will alert with no vehicle present inthe blind zone.Circumstances where false alerts mayoccur:• Road guardrails.• Motorway concrete walls.• Construction areas.• Sharp turns around a building.• Bushes and trees.• Cyclists and motorcyclists.• Coming to a stop with a vehicle directly

behind but very close.

Turning the system on and offNote: The on or off position will remain untilmanually changed.You can turn the system on and off usingthe information display. See InformationDisplays (page 75).

67

Windows and Mirrors

Page 70: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

When you turn the system off no furtheralerts will be received. The BLIS warningindicator will illuminate. See WarningLamps and Indicators (page 71).

Detection errorsNote: The alert indicator in the mirror willnot illuminate.If the system senses a fault on eithersensor, the system warning symbol willilluminate and remain on. The informationdisplay will confirm the fault and indicatewhether the left or right side is affected.

Blocked sensor

WARNINGPrior to the system recognizing ablocked condition and issuing awarning, the number of missed

objects will increase.

CAUTIONThe sensors may not detect vehiclesin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.

Note: Keep the rear bumper areasurrounding the sensors free from dirt, iceand snow.If a sensor becomes blocked the systemperformance may degrade. A blockedsensor message may be displayed.The system will automatically return tonormal operation once two other vehicleshave been detected on both sides.

Trailer towing false alerts

CAUTIONVehicles fitted with a trailer towmodule not approved by us may notcorrectly be detected. Switch the

system off to avoid false alerts. SeeInformation Displays (page 75).

If the vehicle is fitted with a trailer towmodule approved by us, the system willdetect a connected trailer and deactivate.A confirmation message will be shown inthe information display. See InformationMessages (page 83). The BLIS warningindicator will illuminate. See WarningLamps and Indicators (page 71).

68

Windows and Mirrors

Page 71: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

GAUGESType 1

BCEF

A

E132065

D

Information display. See Information Displays (page 75).ASpeedometerBEngine coolant temperature gaugeCTripmeter reset buttonDFuel gaugeETachometerF

69

Instrument Cluster

Page 72: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Type 2 and 3

BCDE

A

E130149

Information display. See Information Displays (page 75).ASpeedometerBEngine coolant temperature gaugeCFuel gaugeDTachometerE

Engine coolant temperature gaugeAll vehiclesShows the temperature of the enginecoolant. At normal operating temperature,the needle will remain in the centre section.

CAUTIONDo not restart the engine until thecause of overheating has beenresolved.

If the needle enters the red section, theengine is overheating. Stop the engine,switch the ignition off and determine thecause once the engine has cooled down.See Engine Coolant Check (page 199).

Fuel gaugeThe arrow adjacent to the fuel pumpsymbol indicates on which side of thevehicle the fuel filler cap is located.

70

Instrument Cluster

Page 73: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

WARNING LAMPS ANDINDICATORSThe following warning lamps andindicators illuminate when the ignition isswitched on:• Airbag• ABS• Stability control (ESP)• Low fuel• Brake system• Frost• ESP offIf a warning or indicator lamp does notilluminate when the ignition is switchedon, it indicates a malfunction. Have thesystem checked by properly trainedtechnician.

ABS warning lampIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You will continue

to have normal braking (without ABS).Have the system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as possible.

Airbag warning lampIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. Have the system

checked by a properly trained technician.

Blind spot monitor indicator

E124823

It will illuminate when thisfeature is deactivated or inconjunction with a message.

See Blind Spot Monitor (page 66). SeeInformation Messages (page 83).

Brake system lampIt illuminates when the parkingbrake is engaged.

WARNINGReduce your speed gradually andstop your vehicle as soon as it is safeto do so. Use your brakes with care.

If it illuminates when you are driving, checkthat the parking brake is not engaged. Ifthe parking brake is not engaged, thisindicates a malfunction. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technicianimmediately.

Cruise control indicator

E71340

It will illuminate when you haveset a speed using the cruisecontrol system. See Using

Cruise Control (page 146).

Direction indicatorsFlashes during operation. Asudden increase in the rate offlashing warns of a failed

indicator bulb. See Changing a Bulb(page 55).

Engine warning lampIf it illuminates with the enginerunning, this indicates amalfunction. If it flashes when

you are driving, reduce the speed of yourvehicle immediately. If it continues toflash, avoid heavy acceleration ordeceleration. Have the system checked bya properly trained technician immediately.

CAUTIONIf the engine warning lamp illuminatesin conjunction with a message, havethe system checked as soon as

possible.

71

Instrument Cluster

Page 74: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Forward alert warning indicatorIt will illuminate when thisfeature is switched off or inconjunction with a message.

See Forward alert function (page 152).

Front fog lamp indicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe front fog lamps on.

Frost warning lampWARNING

Even if the temperature rises toabove +4°C (39°F) there is noguarantee that the road is free of

hazards caused by inclement weather.

It will illuminate and glow amberwhen the outside airtemperature is between +4°C

(39°F) and 0°C (32°F). It will glow redwhen the temperature is below 0°C(32°F).

Glow plug indicatorSee Starting a Diesel Engine(page 116).

Headlamp indicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe headlamp dipped beam orthe side and tail lamps on.

Ignition warning lampIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. Switch off all

unnecessary electrical equipment. Havethe system checked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately.

Lane departure warning indicatorIt will illuminate when thisfeature is switched off or inconjunction with a message.

See Lane Departure Warning (page 156).

Low fuel level warning lampIf it illuminates, refuel as soon aspossible.

Low tyre pressure warning lampSee Tyre Pressure MonitoringSystem (page 217).

Main beam indicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe headlamp main beam on. Itwill flash when you use the

headlamp flasher.

Message indicatorIt will illuminate when a newmessage is stored in theinformation display. See

Information Messages (page 83).

Oil pressure warning lampCAUTION

Do not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level beingcorrect. Have the system checked by

a properly trained technician immediately.

If it stays on after starting orilluminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Stop

your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch the engine off. Check the engineoil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 198).

72

Instrument Cluster

Page 75: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Rear fog lamp indicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe rear fog lamps on.

Seat belt reminderSee Seat belt reminder (page26).

Stability control (ESP) indicatorWhile driving, it flashes duringactivation of the system. Afterswitching on the ignition, if it

does not illuminate or illuminatescontinuously while driving, this indicates amalfunction. During a malfunction, thesystem switches off. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technicianas soon as possible.

If you switch traction control off,the warning lamp will illuminate.The lamp will go out when you

switch the system back on or when youswitch the ignition off.

Start-stop indicatorIt will illuminate to inform youwhen the engine shuts down orin conjunction with a message.

See Using start-stop (page 120). SeeInformation Messages (page 83).

AUDIBLE WARNINGS ANDINDICATORSSwitching the chimes on and offYou can deactivate certain chimes in theInformation display using the steeringwheel control. For item location: See At aGlance (page 10).To set which chimes should sound:

1. Press the left arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the main menu.

2. Highlight Settings with the up anddown arrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

3. Highlight Chimes and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Information or Warning andpress the OK button to switch thechime on and off.

5. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Press and hold the left arrowbutton to return to the main menudisplay.

Automatic transmissionIf position P is not selected, a warningchime will sound when the driver’s door isopened.

FrostWARNING

Even if the temperature rises toabove +4°C (39°F) there is noguarantee that the road is free of

hazards caused by inclement weather.

A warning chime will sound in the followingconditions:• +4°C (39°F) or lower: frost warning.• 0°C (32°F) or lower: danger of icy

roads.

Key outside carVehicles with keyless entryIf the engine is running and a passive keyis no longer detected within the vehicleinterior, a warning chime will sound.

73

Instrument Cluster

Page 76: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Door openA warning chime will sound when any dooris opened if the vehicle exceeds a relativelylow speed.

Lights onA warning chime will sound if the driver’sdoor is opened with the exterior lightsswitched on and the ignition switched off.

Low fuelA warning chime will sound when theremaining fuel is less than approximately6 litres (1.3 gallons).

Seat belt reminderSee Seat belt reminder (page 26).

74

Instrument Cluster

Page 77: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

GENERAL INFORMATIONNote: The information display will remainon for several minutes after you switch offthe ignition.Various systems on your vehicle can becontrolled using the information displaycontrols on the steering column.Corresponding information is displayed inthe information display.For detailed instructions on navigation,refer to the appropriate manual.

Device listThe icon changes to show the currentfunction in use.

CD

Radio

Auxiliary input

Phone

Settings

ControlsPress the up and down arrow buttons toscroll through and highlight the optionswithin a menu.Press the right arrow button to enter asub-menu.Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.Hold the left arrow button pressed at anytime to return to the main menu display(escape button).Press the OK button to choose andconfirm a setting.

Menu structure - informationdisplayAll vehiclesYou can access the menu using theInformation display control. For itemlocation: See At a Glance (page 10).

75

Information Displays

Page 78: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Trip Computer Trip odometerDist to emptyInstant fuelAverage fuel

Average speedOutside airAll values

Traction ctrl

Forward alert

BLISCity Stop

Hill start assist

Lane departure

Traffic signs

Driver assist

Deflation detection

SeatbeltsAuto StartStopDriver AlertTraffic signs

Ford EcoMode

Dimming

Auto light rainAmbient light

Auto highbeam

Lighting

AutoManualSet

Gear shiftingAnticipationSpeedFord EcoMode

High SensitivityNormal SensLow SensitivityOff

RecognitionSpeed warning

SensitivityIntensity

Hdlamp delay Manual20 seconds40 seconds60 seconds

Information

Settings

BAE133367

Driver alert

OnSensitivity

76

Information Displays

Page 79: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Chimes

Convenience

Park slot found

WarningInformation

Aux heaterPark heater

Alarm

Time 1Time 2OnceHeat now

Full guardReducedAsk on exit

System check

BA

E133368

EnglishDeutschItalianoFrançaisEspañolTürkçePyccкийNederlandsPolski

PortuguêsSvenska

Language

Measure unit

Display

l/100kmMiles/Gallon

Always onOn demandAlways off

Navigation info

Temp unit °Celsius°Fahrenheit

77

Information Displays

Page 80: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Menu structure - information andentertainment display

You can access the menu using thebuttons on the audio or navigation unit.

All vehicles

CD

FMFM ASTDAB1DAB2AM

Adaptive volume

iPODUSBBluetooth audioLine in

AM AST

Radio

Auxiliary

Dial numberPhone bookCall listsBluetoothRedialSelect phoneReject all calls

Phone

Audio settingsSoundNav audio mixingDSP settingsDSP equaliserNewsAlt frequencyRDS regionalDAB service linkBluetoothSet timeClock settingsSet dateGPS timeSet time zoneSummertime24-hour mode

Menu

E130532

78

Information Displays

Page 81: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Menu structure - information andentertainment display

You can access the menu using theInformation and entertainment displaycontrol. For item location: See At aGlance (page 10).

79

Information Displays

Page 82: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Vehicles with navigation system

Navigation RouteRoute sections listBlock next section

Destination inputUnblock rt sectn

Unblock rt sectn

EcoFastShortAlways askLeisurelyNormalFast

Driver

Active guidance

City/postcodeStreetDistrictStart guidance

Country

TrafficTMC messagesBlock next sectionRoute sections list

TA

Points of interestNear destinationAlong motorwayPOIs near addressSearch by name

POIs nearby

Home address

Last destinationsChange addressStart guidance

Route options Route

Tour planningStored tours

Store position

New tour

Favourites Favourites A-Z

B CAE130534

80

Information Displays

Page 83: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

CD

Special functions

TrailerRoof box

Eco settings

MotorwayTunnelFerry/motorailTollSeasonal roads

Dynamic

Toll sticker

See separate menu structureRadio See separate menu structureAuxiliary See separate menu structurePhone See separate menu structure

Menu Navigation

System infoEnter positionDemo mode

GPS info

DriverEco SettingsDynamicMotorwayTunnelFerry/motorailTollSeasonal roads

Route

Toll sticker

Route options

Arrows on mapNav time displayMap heading upBest contrast

Map contentMap display

B C

CB

A

E130535

81

Information Displays

Page 84: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Audio SettingsClock Settings

Signs/lanesSpeed limitsNav icons in lists

Clear last destinationClear favouritesDelete home addressClear all

Assistance options

Personal data

Reset all settings

See separate menu structureSee separate menu structure

B C

E130536

TRIP COMPUTERTrip OdometerRegisters the mileage of individualjourneys.

Distance to emptyIndicates the approximate distance thevehicle will travel on the fuel remaining inthe tank. Changes in driving pattern maycause the value to vary.

Instantaneous fuel consumptionIndicates the current average fuelconsumption.

Average fuel consumptionIndicates the average fuel consumptionsince the function was last reset.

Average speedIndicates the average speed calculatedsince the function was last reset.

Outside air temperatureShows the outside air temperature.

OdometerRegisters the total mileage of the vehicle.

Resetting the trip computerTo reset a particular display:1. Highlight Trip Computer with the up

and down arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.

2. Highlight the function to be reset.3. Hold the OK button pressed.

PERSONALISED SETTINGSLanguage settingA choice of eleven languages are available:English, German, Italian, French, Spanish,Turkish, Russian, Dutch, Polish, Swedishand Portuguese.

82

Information Displays

Page 85: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Measure unitsTo toggle between metric and imperialunits, scroll to this display and press theOK button.Toggling the units of measure using thisdisplay will affect the following displays:• Distance to empty.• Average fuel consumption.• Instantaneous fuel consumption.• Average speed.

Temperature unitsTo toggle between metric and imperialunits, scroll to this display and press theOK button.Toggling the temperature units using thisdisplay will affect the following displays:• Outside air temperature.• The temperature display in the

automatic climate control.

Chime deactivationThe following chimes can be deactivated:• Warning messages.• Information messages.

INFORMATION MESSAGESNote: Certain messages may beabbreviated or shortened depending uponwhich cluster type you have.

E130248

Press the OK button to acknowledge andremove some messages from theinformation display. Other messages willbe removed automatically after a shorttime.Certain messages need to be confirmedbefore you can access the menus.

Message indicatorThe message indicatorilluminates to supplement somemessages. It will be red or amber

depending on the severity of the messageand will remain on until the cause of themessage has been rectified.

Some messages will be supplemented bya system specific symbol with a messageindicator.

83

Information Displays

Page 86: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Active City Stop

ActionIndicatorMessage

See Using Active City Stop (page 162).amberActive City Stop Sensorblocked Clean screen

See Using Active City Stop (page 162).amberActive City Stop notavailable

See Using Active City Stop (page 162).-Active City Stop Autobraking

Airbag

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberAirbag malfunction

service now

Alarm

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

See Alarm (page 39).amberAlarm triggered checkvehicle

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.-Alarm malfunction

service required

Automatic main beam control

ActionIndicatorMessage

The front camera sensor has reduced visibility.Clean the windscreen.

amberFront camera low visib-ility Clean screen

The front camera sensor has malfunctioned. Havethis checked as soon as possible.

amberFront camera malfunc-tion Service required

84

Information Displays

Page 87: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Battery and charging system

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so andswitch off the ignition. Have the system checkedby a properly trained technician as soon aspossible.

redElectrical system overvoltage stop safely

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBattery low check

handbook

Blind spot monitor

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

See Blind Spot Monitor (page 66).amberBLIS low visibility checkhandbook

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS: right sensor fault

service required

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS: left sensor fault

service required

See Blind Spot Monitor (page 66).amberBLIS not availabletrailer attached

Child power lock

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberChild lock malfunction

service required

Climate control

ActionIndicatorMessage

See Auxiliary Heater (page 102).amberAuxiliary Heater on

See Auxiliary Heater (page 102).-Auxiliary Heater off

85

Information Displays

Page 88: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Cruise control and Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

ActionIndicatorMessage

See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page 148).amberFront radar sensor

blocked check hand-book

See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page 148).amberForward Alert not avail-able

See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page 148).amberACC not available

Doors open

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible andclose.redDriver door open

Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible andclose.redDriver side rear door

open

Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible andclose.redPassenger door open

Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible andclose.redPassenger side rear

door open

Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible andclose.redLuggage compartment

lid open

Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible andclose. See Opening and Closing the Bonnet(page 190).

redBonnet open

Driver alert

ActionIndicatorMessage

Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.redDriver fatigue warningRest now

Take a rest break soon.amberDriver fatigue warningRest suggested

86

Information Displays

Page 89: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Engine immobiliser

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Your key has not been recognised. Remove thekey and try again.amberImmobiliser active

check handbook

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberImmobiliser malfunc-

tion service required

Hill start assist

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.amberHill start assist not

available

Keyless entry

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

See Keyless Entry (page 34).redFord KeyFree key notinside car

See Keyless Entry (page 34).amberFord KeyFree key insidevehicle

See Keyless Entry (page 34).-Ford KeyFree Place keyin key holder

See Keyless Entry (page 34).-Ford KeyFree no keydetected

See Changing the remote control battery (page29).-Key battery low replace

soon

See Steering Wheel Lock (page 114).-Steering lock engagedturn steering wheel

87

Information Displays

Page 90: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Lane keeping aid

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

amberLane keeping aidmalfunction Servicerequired

Lighting

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberHeadlamp malfunction

service required

One or both of the brake lamp bulbs have blown.Check the brake lamp bulbs. See Changing aBulb (page 55).

-Brake lamp bulb fault

One or both of the side or tail lamp bulbs haveblown. Check the side and tail lamp bulbs. SeeChanging a Bulb (page 55).

-Park lamp bulb fault

One or both of the rear fog lamp bulbs have blown.Check the rear fog lamp bulbs. See Changing aBulb (page 55).

-Rear fog lamp bulbfault

One or both of the headlamp dipped beam bulbshave blown. Check the headlamp dipped beambulbs. See Changing a Bulb (page 55).

-Dipped beam bulb fault

One or both of the brake lamp bulbs on your trailerhave blown. Check the brake lamp bulbs on yourtrailer.

-Trailer brake lamp bulbfault

One or both of the direction indicator bulbs onyour trailer have blown. Check the direction indic-ator bulbs on your trailer.

-Trailer turn lamp bulbfault

88

Information Displays

Page 91: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Maintenance

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so andswitch off the ignition. Have the system checkedby a properly trained technician as soon aspossible.

redHigh engine temper-ature stop safely

Check the brake fluid level. See Brake and ClutchFluid Check (page 200).redBrake fluid level low

service now

Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. Havethe system checked by a properly trained techni-cian immediately.

redBrake system malfunc-tion stop safely

Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible andswitch off the engine immediately. Have thesystem checked by a properly trained technicianimmediately.

redEngine malfunctionservice now

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberWater detected in fuel

service required

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberEngine malfunction

service now

Check the washer fluid level. See Washer FluidCheck (page 200).-Washer fluid level low

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.-Engine oil change due

Occupant protection

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

-Service Beltminder

Parking aid

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

amberParking aid malfunctionService required

89

Information Displays

Page 92: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Parking brake

ActionIndicatorMessage

See Parking Brake (page 132).redPark brake applied

See Parking Brake (page 132).amberPark brake applied

Power steering

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so andswitch off the ignition. Have the system checkedby a properly trained technician as soon aspossible.

redSteering lock malfunc-tion stop safely

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so andswitch off the ignition. Have the system checkedby a properly trained technician as soon aspossible.

redSteering loss stopsafely

Power steering. Full steering will be maintainedbut you will need to exert greater force on thesteering wheel. Have the system checked by aproperly trained technician as soon as possible.

amberSteering assistmalfunction servicerequired

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.amberSteering malfunction

service now

Stability control (ESP)

ActionIndicatorMessage

See General Information (page 75).amberTraction control off

Starting the engine

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

See Keyless Starting (page 116).redFord KeyFree switchignition off pressPOWER

90

Information Displays

Page 93: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

See Diesel Particulate Filter (page 118).amberDrive to clean exhaustfilter check handbook

See Diesel Particulate Filter (page 118).amberEngine malfunctionservice now

See Keyless Starting (page 116).-Press brake to start

See Keyless Starting (page 116).-Press clutch to start

See Keyless Starting (page 116).-Press brake and clutchto start

See Starting a Diesel Engine (page 116).-Engine preheating

See Diesel Particulate Filter (page 118).-Cleaning exhaust filter

See Diesel Particulate Filter (page 118).-Filter cleaningcomplete

Start-stop

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Switch the ignition off before leaving the vehicleif the system has shut down the engine. See Usingstart-stop (page 120).

redAuto StartStop Switchignition off

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.amber

Auto StartStopmalfunction servicerequired

The engine needs to be restarted, press the clutchpedal to start. See Using start-stop (page 120).-Auto StartStop Press

clutch to start engine

Select neutral for the system to restart the engine.See Using start-stop (page 120).-Auto StartStop Select

neutral

The system is not functioning. A manual restart isrequired.-Auto StartStop Manual

Start required

91

Information Displays

Page 94: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Transmission

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Under certain driving conditions it is possible thatthe clutches in the transmission can overheat. Inthese circumstances it is necessary to press thebrake pedal and stop the vehicle to prevent furtheroverheating. Select N (NEUTRAL) or P (PARK)and apply the foot brake and parking brake untilthe transmission has cooled and the messagedisappears from the display. If the vehicle is drivenwith this message active you may experiencevehicle judder as a further overheat warning.

redTransmission too hotpress brake

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.redTransmission malfunc-

tion service now

The transmission is too hot. In these extremeconditions the transmission will disengage drivein order to prevent damage due to overheating.You will not be able to drive until the transmissionhas cooled. Select N (NEUTRAL) or P (PARK)and apply the foot brake and parking brake untilthe transmission has cooled and the messagedisappears from the display.

redTransmission over-heating stop safely

Under certain driving conditions it is possible thatthe clutches in the transmission can overheat. Inthese circumstances it is necessary to press thebrake pedal and stop the vehicle to prevent furtheroverheating. Select N (NEUTRAL) or P (PARK)and apply the foot brake and parking brake untilthe transmission has cooled and the messagedisappears from the display. If the vehicle is drivenwith this message active you may experiencevehicle judder as a further overheat warning.

amberTransmission too hotpress brake

Some gears may not be available. Have thesystem checked by a properly trained technicianas soon as possible.

amberTransmission limitedfunction check hand-book

At low outside temperatures, after starting theengine, it may take the transmission severalseconds to engage R (REVERSE) or D (DRIVE).Keep the brake pedal depressed until thesemessages disappear from the display.

-Transmission warmingup please wait

92

Information Displays

Page 95: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

See Automatic Transmission (page 129). SeeStarting and Stopping the Engine (page 114).-Transmission not in

Park select P

See Automatic Transmission (page 129). SeeStarting and Stopping the Engine (page 114).-To start press brake

See Automatic Transmission (page 129).-Press brake pedal

Tyre pressure monitoring system

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

The pressure in one or more tyres has dropped.Check as soon as possible.amberCheck tyre pressures

Permanent malfunction. Have your vehiclechecked by a properly trained technician.amber

Tyre pressure sysmalfunction servicerequired

93

Information Displays

Page 96: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONOutside airKeep the air intakes forward of thewindscreen free from obstruction (snow,leaves etc.) to allow the climate controlsystem to function effectively.

Recirculated airCAUTION

Prolonged use of recirculated air maycause the windows to mist up. If thewindows mist up, follow the settings

for defrosting and demisting thewindscreen.

The air currently in the passengercompartment will be recirculated. Outsideair will not enter the vehicle.

HeatingHeating performance depends on thetemperature of the engine coolant.

Air conditioningNote: The air conditioning operates onlywhen the temperature is above 4°C (39°F).Note: If you use the air conditioning, thefuel consumption of your vehicle will behigher.Air is directed through the evaporatorwhere it is cooled. Humidity is extractedfrom the air to help keep the windows freeof mist. The resulting condensation isdirected to the outside of the vehicle andit is therefore normal if you see a smallpool of water under your vehicle.

General information on controllingthe interior climateFully close all the windows.

Warming the interiorDirect the air towards your feet. In cold orhumid weather conditions, direct some ofthe air towards the windscreen and thedoor windows.

Cooling the interiorDirect the air towards your face.

AIR VENTSCentre air vents

E132995

94

Climate Control

Page 97: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Side air vent

E132996

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLAir distribution control

E74660

A

CB D

E

Face levelAFace level and footwellBFootwellCFootwell and windscreenDWindscreenE

You can set the air distribution control toany position between the symbols.

95

Climate Control

Page 98: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Blower

E75470

A

OffANote: If you switch the blower off, thewindscreen may mist up.

Recirculated air

E73059

Press the button to toggle between outsideair and recirculated air.

Heating the interior quickly

E129884

Ventilation

E129885

Set the air distribution control, blower andair vents to suit your requirements.

Air conditioningSwitching the air conditioning on andoff

If you turn the blower off, the airconditioning will turn off. When you turnthe blower on again, the air conditioningwill come on automatically.

Cooling with outside air

E129886

Cooling the interior quickly

E129887

96

Climate Control

Page 99: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

With the heater control in this position, theair conditioning and recirculated air willswitch on automatically.You can switch the air conditioning andrecirculated air on and off.

Defrosting and demisting thewindscreen

E129888

When the temperature is above 4°C(39°F), the air conditioning will switch onautomatically. Make sure that the bloweris on. The indicator in the switch willilluminate during defrosting and demisting.

If you move the air distribution control toa position other than windscreen, the A/Cwill remain on.You can switch the air conditioning andrecirculated air on and off while the airdistribution control is set to windscreenIf necessary, switch the heated windowson. See Heated Windows and Mirrors(page 100).

Reducing interior air humidity

E129889

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

E133114

The system controls the temperature,amount and distribution of the air flowautomatically and adjusts them accordingto the driving and weather conditions.Pressing the AUTO button once switcheson the auto mode.

The system in your vehicle is dual-zoneautomatic climate control. When thesystem is in mono mode, all thetemperature zones are linked to the driver'szone. When you switch mono mode off,the dual-zone system allows you to setdifferent temperatures for the driver's andfront passenger's side.

97

Climate Control

Page 100: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: Avoid adjusting the settings whenthe vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold.The automatic climate control adjusts tothe current circumstances automatically.For the system to function properly, the sideand centre vents should be fully open.Note: The sunload sensor is located on topof the instrument panel. Do not cover thesensor with any objects.Note: At low outside temperatures, whenthe system is in auto mode, the air streamwill be directed to the windscreen and theside windows as long as the engine is cold.

Setting the temperature

E133115

You can set the temperature between15.5°C (60°F) and 29.5°C (85°F) in stepsof 0.5°C (1°F). In position LO, 15°C (59°F),the system will switch to permanentcooling. In position HI, 30°C (86°F), thesystem will switch to permanent heating.Note: If either position LO or HI is selected,the system will not regulate a stabletemperature.

Mono modeIn mono mode, the temperature settingsfor both the driver’s and passenger’s sideare linked. If you adjust the temperatureusing the rotary control on the driver’s side,the settings will be adjusted to the samesetting on the passenger’s side. In monomode, MONO appears in the display.

To switch mono mode offSelect a temperature for the passenger’sside with the rotary control on thepassenger’s side. Mono mode will switchoff and MONO disappears from thedisplay. The temperature for the driver’sside will remain unchanged. You can nowadjust the driver and passenger sidetemperatures independently of eachanother. The temperature settings for eachside are shown in the display. You can seta temperature difference of up to 4°C(8°F).Note: If you set a temperature differenceof greater than 4°C (8°F), the temperatureon the other side will be adjusted so thatthe difference remains 4°C (8°F).Note: If you set one of the sides to HI or LO,both sides will be set to HI or LO.

To switch mono mode back on

E133120

To switch mono mode back on, press andhold the AUTO button. MONO reappearsin the display and the passenger’s sidetemperature will be adjusted to the driver’sside temperature.

Blower

Use the buttons to adjust the blowerspeed.The blower setting is indicated in thedisplay.To return to auto mode, press the AUTObutton.

98

Climate Control

Page 101: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Air distributionTo adjust air distribution, press the desiredbutton. Any combination of settings canbe selected simultaneously.

E70308

A B C

FootwellAFace levelBWindscreenC

When you select windscreen defrostingand demisting, A, B and C switch offautomatically and the air conditioningswitches on. Outside air will flow into thevehicle. You cannot select recirculated air.

Cooling the interior quickly

E133122

Windscreen defrosting anddemisting

E91392

Press the windscreen defrosting anddemisting button. Outside air will flow intothe vehicle. Air conditioning isautomatically selected. As long as the airdistribution is set to this position, youcannot select recirculated air.

The blower speed and the temperaturecontrol operate automatically and cannotbe adjusted manually. The blower is set tohigh speed and the temperature to HI.When you select windscreen defrostingand demisting, the heated screens switchon automatically and switch off after ashort time.To return to auto mode, press the AUTObutton.

Switching the air conditioning onand off

E91393

Press the A/C button to switch the airconditioning on and off. A/C OFF appearsin the display when the air conditioning isswitched off.A/C ON appears in the display when theair conditioning is switched on.

Recirculated air

Press the recirculated air button to togglebetween outside air and recirculated air.Note: When the system is in auto mode andthe interior and exterior temperatures arequite hot, the system selects recirculatedair automatically to maximise cooling of theinterior. Once the selected temperature isreached, the system will reselect outside airautomatically.

Switching off the automaticclimate control

E133093

Press the button.

99

Climate Control

Page 102: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

When switched off, the heating, ventilationand air conditioning system is switched offand recirculated air is selected.

HEATED WINDOWS ANDMIRRORSHeated windowsUse the heated windows to defrost ordemist the windscreen or rear window.Note: The heated windows operate onlywhen the engine is running.

Heated windscreen

E72506

Heated rear window

E72507

Vehicles without auxiliary heaterIf the ambient temperature is below 5°C(41°F) and the engine coolant is below65°C (149°F), the heated windscreen andheated rear window will switch onautomatically. They will switch offautomatically.

Heated exterior mirrorsElectric exterior mirrors are fitted with aheating element that will defrost or demistthe mirror glass. They will switch onautomatically when you switch the heatedrear window on.

ELECTRIC SUNROOF

WARNINGBefore operating the electric sunroofyou should verify it is free ofobstructions and ensure that children

and/or pets are not in the proximity of thesunroof opening. Failure to do so couldresult in serious personal injury. It is theprimary responsibility of the supervisingadults to never leave a child unattendedin a vehicle and to never leave the keys inan unattended vehicle.

Note: When the switches are operatedoften during a short period of time, thesystem might become inoperable for acertain time to prevent damage due tooverheating.Note: The electric sunroof can also beoperated with the ignition off via the globalopening and global closing function. SeeGlobal Opening and Closing (page 36).There are two ways of opening the sunroof– the rear of the sunroof lifts open or thesunroof opens from the front, sliding backunder the roof. The sunroof opens andcloses whilst the switch is pressed.Switch on the ignition to operate theelectric sunroof.The power sunroof is operated by a switchlocated between the sun visors.

100

Climate Control

Page 103: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Opening and closing the sunroof

E72188

Tilting the sunroof

E72189

Opening and closing the sunroofautomaticallyNote: When opening automatically, thesunroof will stop about 8 cm from the fullyopened position. This position reduces thebuffeting noise which is sometimes heardwhen the sunroof is fully open. The sunroofwill only stop automatically in this positionwhen the sunroof is opened automatically.

To open or close the sunroof automaticallypress either side of the switch to thesecond action point and release itcompletely. Press again to stop.When the closed position is reached, thesunroof stops automatically.

Sunroof anti-trap protectionWARNINGS

The anti-trap function is deactivateduntil the memory has been reset.Careless closing of the window can

cause injuries.Careless closing of the electricsunroof can override the anti-trapprotection and cause injuries.

The sunroof will stop automatically whileclosing and reverse some distance if thereis an obstacle in the way.To override anti-trap protection when thereis a resistance, e. g. in the winter, proceedas follows:

WARNINGWhile the sunroof is being closed forthe third time, the anti-trap functionis disabled. Make sure there are no

obstacles in the way of the closing sunroof.

Close the sunroof a third time to theresistance. The anti-trap function isdisabled and the sunroof cannot be closedautomatically. The sunroof will overridethe resistance and can then be closed fully.If the sunroof does not close after the thirdattempt, have it checked by an expert.

101

Climate Control

Page 104: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Sunroof safety modeWARNING

The anti-trap function is not activeduring this procedure. Make sure thatthere are no obstacles in the way of

the closing sunroof.

If the system detects a malfunction, itenters a safety mode. The sunroof willmove for only about 0.5 seconds at a timeand then stop again. Close the sunroof bypressing the button again when thesunroof stops moving. When the rear ofthe sunroof is lifted, lift the rear all the wayand then close the sunroof. Have thesystem checked by an expert immediately.

Sunroof relearningWARNING

The anti-trap function is not activeduring this procedure. Make sure thatthere are no obstacles in the way of

the closing sunroof.

In case the sunroof no longer closesproperly, follow this relearning procedure:• Tilt the rear of the sunroof as far as

possible. Release the button.• Press and hold the same button again

for 30 seconds until you see thesunroof move.

• Release the button and immediatelypress and hold it again. The sunroofwill close, open fully and then closeagain. Do not release the button beforethe sunroof has reached the closedposition for the second time.

If the button is not pressed continuously,the relearning function will be interrupted.Start the procedure once more from thebeginning.

AUXILIARY HEATERParking heater

WARNINGSThe parking heater must not beoperated at filling stations, nearsources of combustible vapours or

dust or in enclosed spaces.The parking heater should beswitched on for approximately 10minutes at least once a month all

year round. This prevents the water pumpand heater motor from seizing.

Note: The parking heater will only operateif there is at least 7.5 litres (1.6 gallons) offuel in the fuel tank and the ambienttemperature is below 15°C (59°F). Theheater will not operate if the battery is low.Note: The heating depends on the outsideair temperature.Note: When the parking heater is activated,exhaust fumes may come from under thesides of the vehicle. This is normal.Note: On vehicles with manual climatecontrol the heating of the vehicle interior isdependent on the temperature, airdistribution and blower control settings.The parking heater operates independentlyof the vehicle heater by heating theengine’s coolant circuit. It is fed from thevehicle fuel tank. You can also use it whilethe vehicle is in motion to help the vehicleheater warm up the interior more quickly.Used properly, the parking heater providesthe following benefits:

102

Climate Control

Page 105: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

• It preheats the interior of the vehicle.• It keeps the windows clear of ice in the

event of frost and preventscondensation.

• It avoids cold starts and allows theengine to reach operating temperaturesooner.

To prevent the battery from discharging:• Once the parking heater has performed

one heating cycle, the nextprogrammed heating cycle will only becarried out if you have started thevehicle’s engine in between.

• After a heating cycle, drive the vehiclefor at least the period of the heatingcycle.

Programming the parking heaterNote: The programmed time is the time atwhich you wish the vehicle to be warm andready to drive, not the time at which theheater switches on.Note: You must programme the times atleast 70 minutes in advance of the time youwish to set.Note: You must set the time and datecorrectly. See Clock (page 111).To programme the heating times:1. Use the arrow buttons on the steering

wheel to enter the main menu. SeeInformation Displays (page 75).

2. Select the park heater option.

E136301

Once

Program 1Program 2

Heat now

Park Heater

• The two time functions allow you toprogramme up to two heating cyclesfor each day of the week. These timeswill remain stored and the heater willwarm up the vehicle at these times onthese days every week.

• The function once allows you toprogramme one heating cycle for onespecific day.

• The function Heat now automaticallyswitches on the heater.

Programming the functions Program 1and Program 2

E74468

FridayThursday

TuesdayMonday

Wednesday

[07:55]

Program 1

103

Climate Control

Page 106: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

1. Use the arrow buttons on the steeringwheel to enter the main menu.

2. Select the first programme time list.3. Highlight the day on which the heater

should warm up the vehicle.4. Press the OK button.5. Continue in the same way to select all

the days on which the heater shouldwarm up the vehicle.

6. To set the time at which the vehicleshould be warmed up, highlight thetime at the top of the display and pressthe OK button. The hours start to flash.

7. Adjust the hours and minutes asnecessary.

You can use the second programme timelist to set a second cycle, for exampledifferent times on different days or twiceon the same day. The programmingprocedure is the same as for the firstprogramme timer..

Deactivating the programmed heater1. Use the arrow buttons on the steering

wheel to enter the main menu.2. Uncheck the active program session.

Programming the heater for a singlecycle1. Select Once and press the right arrow

button.2. Press the OK button and set the

required time and date.3. Press OK to confirm the set time and

date.

Activating the heater manuallyHighlight Heat now and press the OKbutton. A cross appears in the box whenthe heater is activated.To deactivate the heater, uncheck theHeat now function.

Fuel operated heater (dependingon country)

WARNINGThe fuel operated heater must notbe operated at filling stations, nearsources of combustible vapours or

dust or in enclosed spaces.

The fuel operated heater aids in warmingthe engine and the vehicle interior onvehicles with a diesel engine. It is switchedon or off automatically depending on theoutside air temperature and the coolanttemperature, unless you have deactivatedit.To deactivate the fuel operated heater:1. Highlight Aux. Heater and press the

OK button. A cross appears in the boxwhen the heater is activated.

Diesel auxiliary heater (dependingon country)The diesel auxiliary heater (PTC electricalheater) aids in warming the engine and thevehicle interior on vehicles with a dieselengine. It is switched on or offautomatically depending on the outsideair temperature, the coolant temperatureand the alternator load.

104

Climate Control

Page 107: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

SITTING IN THE CORRECTPOSITION

E68595

WARNINGSDo not adjust the seats when thevehicle is moving.Only when you use the seat beltproperly, can it hold you in a positionthat allows the airbag to achieve its

optimum effect.

When you use them properly, the seat,head restraint, seat belt and airbags willprovide optimum protection in the eventof a collision. We recommend that you:• sit in an upright position with the base

of your spine as far back as possible.• do not recline the seatback more than

30 degrees.• adjust the head restraint so that the

top of it is level with the top of yourhead and as far forwards as possible,remaining comfortable.

• keep sufficient distance betweenyourself and the steering wheel. Werecommend a minimum of 250millimetres (10 inches) between yourbreastbone and the airbag cover.

• hold the steering wheel with your armsslightly bent.

• bend your legs slightly so that you canpress the pedals fully.

• position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt over the centre of your shoulderand position the lap strap tightly acrossyour hips.

Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and that you can maintain fullcontrol of your vehicle.

MANUAL SEATSMoving the seats backwards andforwards

E130249

WARNINGRock the seat backwards andforwards after releasing the lever tomake sure that it is fully engaged in

its catch.

105

Seats

Page 108: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Adjusting the lumbar support

E78058

Adjusting the height of the driver’sseat

E70730

Adjusting the angle of theseatback

E130250

HEAD RESTRAINTSAdjusting the head restraint

WARNINGSRaise the rear head restraint whenthe rear seat is occupied by apassenger.When using a forward facing childrestraint on a rear seat, alwaysremove the head restraint from that

seat.

E66539

106

Seats

Page 109: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E135437 E135401

Adjust the head restraint so that the topof it is level with the top of your head.

Removing the head restraintPress the locking buttons and remove thehead restraint.

107

Seats

Page 110: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

POWER SEATS

E78060

108

Seats

Page 111: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

REAR SEATS

WARNINGSWhen folding the seatbacks down,take care not to get your fingerscaught between the seatback and

seat frame.Make sure that the seats and theseatbacks are secure and fullyengaged in their catches.

Folding the rear seatbacksforwards

CAUTIONLower the head restraints. See HeadRestraints (page 106).

1

2

1

E135629

1. Press and hold the unlock buttons.2. Push the seatback forwards.

E135628

3

Note: Make sure that the seat belt is fullytightened into the retractor.3. Place the seat belts in the clips on the

outboard trim.

Folding the seat cushions and therear seatbacks forwards

WARNINGMake sure the red indicator is notshowing when you engage the seatin the catches.

CAUTIONSLower the head restraints. See HeadRestraints (page 106).When inserting your fingers betweenthe seat cushion and seatback, takecare not to get your fingers caught on

the ISOFIX anchor points and bracket. SeeISOFIX Anchor Points (page 21).

109

Seats

Page 112: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

2

13

2

E135646

Note: Hold the cushion edge to avoid theISOFIX anchor points and brackets.1. Insert your fingers between the seat

cushion and seatback and fold the seatcushion forwards.

2. Press and hold the unlock buttons.3. Push the seatback forwards.

E135647

4

Note: Make sure that the seat belt is fullytightened into the retractor.4. Place the seat belts in the clips on the

outboard trim.

Folding the seatbacks upWARNING

When folding the seatbacks up,make sure that the belts are visibleto an occupant and not caught

behind the seat.

HEATED SEATS

CAUTIONOperating this function with theengine off will drain the battery.

E130471

The maximum temperature is reachedafter five or six minutes. It is regulatedthermostatically.The seat heating will operate only whenthe ignition is on.

110

Seats

Page 113: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

INSTRUMENT LIGHTINGDIMMER

E132712

Press repeatedly or press and hold untilthe desired level is reached.Note: If the battery is disconnected,discharged, or a new battery is installed, thedimmer will set the illuminated componentsto the maximum setting automatically.

CLOCKSee Information Displays (page 75).

CIGAR LIGHTER

CAUTIONSIf you use the socket when the engineis not running, the battery maydischarge.Do not hold the cigar lighter elementpressed in.

Note: You can use the socket to power 12volt appliances that have a maximumcurrent rating of 10 Amperes. Use only Fordaccessory connectors or connectorsspecified for use with SAE standard sockets.

E132415

Press the element in to use the cigarlighter. It will pop out automatically.

AUXILIARY POWER POINTS

CAUTIONIf you use the socket when the engineis not running, the battery maydischarge.

Note: You can use the socket to power 12volt appliances that have a maximumcurrent rating of 10 Amperes. Use only Fordaccessory connectors or connectorsspecified for use with SAE standard sockets.

E78056

Auxiliary power sockets are located in thecentre console and in the luggagecompartment.

111

Convenience features

Page 114: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

CUP HOLDERS

WARNINGDo not place hot drinks in the cupholders when the vehicle is moving.

Rear seat armrest

E132505

GLASSES HOLDER

E75193

E91508

CHILDMINDER MIRROR

E75192

112

Convenience features

Page 115: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX IN)SOCKET

E132422

See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket(page 243).

USB PORT

E132423

See Connectivity (page 265).

SATELLITE NAVIGATION UNITHOLDERAdjusting the holder

E112711

1

3

2

1. Unlock.2. Adjust the holder to the desired

position.3. Lock.Note: Make sure that the navigation unitholder is locked in position.

FLOOR MATS

WARNINGWhen using the floor mats, alwaysmake sure the floor mat is properlysecured using the appropriate fixings

and positioned so that it does not interferewith the operation of the pedals.

113

Convenience features

Page 116: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

GENERAL INFORMATIONGeneral points on startingIf the battery has been disconnected thevehicle may exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics for approx. 8 kilometres (5miles) after reconnecting the battery.This is because the engine managementsystem must realign itself with the engine.Any unusual driving characteristics duringthis period may be disregarded.

Starting the engine by towing orpushing

WARNINGTo prevent damage you must notpush or tow start your vehicle. Usebooster cables and a booster battery.

See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page206).

IGNITION SWITCH

WARNINGNever return the key to position 0 orI when the vehicle is in motion.

E72128

0 The ignition is off.I The ignition and all main electrical circuitsare disabled.Note: Do not leave the ignition key in thisposition for too long to avoid dischargingthe battery.

II The ignition is switched on. All electricalcircuits are operational. Warning lampsand indicators illuminate. This is the keyposition when driving. You must also selectit when being towed.III The starter motor is activated. Releasethe key as soon as the engine starts.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK

WARNINGAlways check that the steering isunlocked before attempting to moveyour vehicle.

Vehicles without keyless startingTo activate the steering wheel lock;1. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.2. Turn the steering wheel.

Vehicles with keyless startingNote: The steering wheel lock will notactivate when the ignition is on or thevehicle is moving.Your vehicle has an electronicallycontrolled steering wheel lock. Thisoperates automatically.The steering wheel lock will activate aftera short period of time once you haveparked your vehicle and the passive key isoutside of the vehicle, or when you lock thevehicle. See Keyless Entry (page 34).

Deactivating the steering wheel lockSwitch the ignition on, or:Vehicles with automatic transmission• Press the brake pedal.Vehicles with manual transmission• Press the clutch pedal.

114

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Page 117: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

STARTING A PETROL ENGINENote: You can only operate the starter fora maximum of 30 seconds at a time.

Cold or hot engineAll vehicles

CAUTIONWhen the temperature is below -20°C(-4°F), switch the ignition on for atleast one second before starting the

engine. This will make sure that themaximum fuel pressure is established forstarting the engine.

Vehicles with manual transmissionNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Start the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.1. Select park or neutral.2. Fully depress the brake pedal.3. Start the engine.

All vehiclesIf the engine does not start within 15seconds, wait for a short period and tryagain.If the engine does not start after threeattempts, wait 10 seconds and follow theFlooded engine procedure.If you have difficulty starting the enginewhen the temperature is below -25°C(-13°F), press the accelerator pedalbetween ¼ to ½ of its travel and try again.

Flooded engineVehicles with manual transmission1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and

hold it there.3. Start the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmission1. Select park or neutral.2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and

hold it there.3. Fully depress the brake pedal.4. Start the engine.

All vehiclesIf the engine does not start, repeat theCold or hot engine procedure.

Engine idle speed after startingThe speed at which the engine idlesimmediately after starting will varydepending on the engine temperature.If the engine is cold then the idle speed willautomatically be increased in order to heatthe catalytic converter as quickly aspossible. This makes sure that vehicleemissions are kept to an absoluteminimum.The idle speed will slowly decrease to thenormal level as the catalytic converterwarms up.

STARTING A PETROL ENGINE- E85For general information on starting a petrolengine. See Starting a Petrol Engine(page 115).

115

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Page 118: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Starting at low ambienttemperaturesWhen the temperature is lower than -10°C(14°F) and the vehicle is filled with E85, anengine block heater should be used tofacilitate starting. See Engine BlockHeater (page 119). Failure to do this willresult in a non start.If the temperature is expected to remainbelow -10°C (14°F), it is recommendedthat you increase the proportion of petrolin the tank by topping up with 95 octaneunleaded petrol if the tank is not alreadyfull. About 10 litres (2.2 gallons) of petrolwill reduce the proportion of E85 in a ¾ fulltank from 85% to 70% and willconsiderably improve cold start capability.If, at very low temperatures, the tank isfilled with only E85 and there is no way touse an engine block heater, you mayexperience difficulties starting the engine.If the engine fails to start, proceed asfollows:1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.2. Turn the ignition key to position III.

CAUTIONRelease the ignition key as soon asthe engine has started.

3. Gradually release the accelerator pedalafter five seconds of engine crankingor as the engine speed rises.

If the engine fails to start, repeat steps 1, 2and 3, or connect an engine block heaterfor two hours before attempting anotherstart.During starting, the fuel injectors are turnedoff as long as the accelerator pedal isdepressed. This can be used to drainexcessive fuel from the intake manifoldafter several unsuccessful startingattempts.

If the battery has been disconnected orafter the fuel type has been changed, theidle speed may be irregular. This willimprove after 10 to 30 seconds.

STARTING A DIESEL ENGINECold or hot engineAll vehiclesNote: When the temperature is below -15°C(5°F), you may need to crank the engine forup to 25 seconds.Note: Continue cranking the engine until itstarts.Note: You can only operate the starter fora maximum of 30 seconds at a time.

Switch the ignition on and waituntil the glow plug indicator goesoff.

Vehicles with manual transmissionNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Start the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmission1. Select park or neutral.2. Fully depress the brake pedal.3. Start the engine.

KEYLESS STARTING

WARNINGSThe keyless starting system may notfunction if the key is close to metalobjects or electronic devices such as

mobile phones.

116

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Page 119: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

WARNINGSAlways check that the steering wheellock is deactivated beforeattempting to move your vehicle.

See Steering Wheel Lock (page 114).

Note: The ignition may automaticallyswitch off after a period of time if yourvehicle has been left unattended with theignition on. This is to prevent the vehiclebattery from discharging.Note: A valid passive key must be locatedinside the vehicle to switch the ignition onand start the engine.Note: To start your engine you must alsofully depress the brake or clutch pedal,depending on the transmission fitted.

E85766

Ignition onPress the start button once. All electricalcircuits are operational, warning lamps andindicators illuminate.

Starting with automatictransmissionNote: Releasing the brake pedal duringengine start may stop the engine crankingand return to ignition on.1. Make sure the transmission is in P or

N.2. Fully depress the brake pedal.3. Press the start button.

Starting with manual transmissionNote: Releasing the clutch pedal duringengine start will stop the engine crankingand return to ignition on.1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Press the start button.

Starting a diesel engineNote: Engine cranking may not commenceuntil the engine glow plug cycle has beencompleted. This may take several secondsin extremely cold conditions.Note: Continue to press the clutch or brakepedal until engine cranking begins.

Failure to startThe passive starting system will notfunction if:• The passive key frequencies are

jammed.• The passive key battery is flat.If you are unable to start your vehicle carryout the following procedure.

E87381

1. Carefully prise out the cover.

117

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Page 120: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E85767

2. Insert the key into the key holder.3. With the key in this position you can

use the start button to switch theignition on and start your vehicle.

Stopping the engine with thevehicle stationaryNote: The ignition, all electrical circuits,warning lamps and indicators will beswitched off.

Manual transmissionPress the start button.

Automatic transmission1. Move the selector lever to position P.2. Press the start button.

Stopping the engine when thevehicle is moving

WARNINGSwitching off the engine when thevehicle is still moving will result in aloss of brake and steering assistance.

The steering will not be locked, but highereffort will be required. When the ignition isswitched off some electrical circuits,warning lamps and indicators may also beOFF.

Press and hold the start button for twoseconds, or press twice within twoseconds.

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTERThe DPF forms part of the emissionsreduction systems fitted to your vehicle. Itfilters harmful diesel particulates (soot)from the exhaust gas.

RegenerationWARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The DPF

regeneration process creates very highexhaust gas temperatures and the exhaustwill radiate a considerable amount of heatduring and after DPF regeneration, andafter you have switched the engine off.This is a potential fire hazard.

CAUTIONAvoid running out of fuel.

Note: During regeneration at low speed orengine idle, you may smell a hot metallicodour and could notice a clicking metallicsound. This is due to the high temperaturesreached during regeneration and is normal.Note: After you have switched your engineoff the fans may continue to run for a shortperiod of time.Unlike a normal filter which requiresperiodic replacement, the DPF has beendesigned to regenerate, or clean itself tomaintain operating efficiency. Theregeneration process takes placeautomatically. However, some drivingconditions mean that you may need tosupport the regeneration process.

118

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Page 121: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

If you drive only short distances or yourjourneys contain frequent stopping andstarting, where there is increasedacceleration and deceleration, occasionaltrips with the following conditions willassist the regeneration process:• Drive your vehicle at a constant speed,

preferably on a main road or motorway,for up to 20 minutes.

• Avoid prolonged idling and alwaysobserve speed limits and roadconditions.

• Do not switch off the ignition.• Use a lower gear than normal to

maintain a higher engine speed duringthis journey, where appropriate.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINEVehicles with a turbocharger

CAUTIONDo not switch the engine off when itis running at high speed. If you do, theturbocharger will continue running

after the engine oil pressure has droppedto zero. This will lead to prematureturbocharger bearing wear.

Release the accelerator pedal. Wait untilthe engine has reached idle speed and thenswitch it off.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER

CAUTIONMake sure you disconnect the powercable from the engine heaterconnector before driving away.

Note: The engine heater connector islocated in the front bumper.

E135813

Connect the engine heater for two to threehours before starting the engine.

119

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Page 122: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

CAUTIONFor vehicles with Start-stop thebattery requirement is different. Itmust be replaced by one of exactly

the same specification as the original.

The system reduces fuel consumption andCO2 emissions by shutting down theengine when the vehicle is idling, forexample at traffic lights. The engine willautomatically restart when the driverpresses the clutch pedal or when requiredby a vehicle system, for example torecharge the battery.To obtain maximum benefit from thesystem, move the gear lever to the neutralposition and release the clutch pedalduring any stop of longer than threeseconds.

USING START-STOP

WARNINGSThe engine may restartautomatically if required by thesystem. See Principle of Operation

(page 120).Switch the ignition off beforeopening the bonnet or carrying outany maintenance.Always switch the ignition off beforeleaving your vehicle, as the systemmay have shut down the engine but

the ignition will still be live.

Note: The system only operates when theengine is warm and the outside temperatureis between 0°C (32°F) and 30°C (86°F).

Note: If you stall the engine, and thendepress the clutch pedal within a couple ofseconds, the system will automaticallyrestart the engine.Note: The Start-stop indicator willilluminate green when the engine shutsdown. See Warning Lamps and Indicators(page 71).Note: The Start-stop indicator will flashamber, requiring you to select neutral ordepress the clutch pedal. In conjunction amessage will be shown in the display.Note: If the system detects a malfunction,it is deactivated. Have the system checkedby a properly trained technician.Note: If you have switched the system off,the switch will be illuminated.Note: The system is on by default. Toswitch the system off, press the switch inthe instrument panel. The system will onlybe de-activated for the current ignitioncycle. To turn it on, press the switch again.For item location. See At a Glance (page10).

To stop the engine1. Stop the vehicle.2. Move the gear lever to the neutral

position.3. Release the clutch pedal.4. Release the accelerator pedal.The system may not shut down the engineunder certain conditions, for example:• To maintain the interior climate.• Low battery voltage.• The outside temperature is too low or

too high.• The driver's door has been opened.

120

Start-Stop

Page 123: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

• Low engine operating temperature.• Low brake system vacuum.• If a road speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) has

not been exceeded.

To re-start the engineNote: The gear lever must be in the neutralposition.Depress the clutch pedal.The system may automatically restart theengine under certain conditions, forexample:• Low battery voltage.• To maintain the interior climate.

121

Start-Stop

Page 124: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe system assists the driver to drive moreefficiently by constantly monitoringcharacteristics of gear changing,anticipation of traffic conditions andspeeds on motorways and open roads.Note: These efficiency values do not resultin a defined fuel consumption figure. It mightvary as it is not only related to these drivingdisciplines but also influenced by manyother factors such as short journeys and coldstarts.Note: Frequent short journeys, where theengine does not fully warm up, will alsoincrease fuel consumption.The value of these characteristics isrepresented by petals shown in the display,with five petals being the most efficient.The more efficiently you drive, the betterthe rating, and the better your overall fuelconsumption.

Type 1

E121813A B C

Gear shiftingAAnticipationBEfficient speedC

Gear shiftingUsing the highest drivable gear appropriatefor the road conditions will improve fuelconsumption.

AnticipationAdjusting your vehicle speed and thedistance to other vehicles without the needfor heavy braking or acceleration willimprove fuel consumption.

Efficient speedHigher speeds use more fuel. Reducingyour cruising speed on open roads willimprove fuel consumption.

Type 2 and 3The relevant information will be shown inthe display.

USING ECO MODEThe system is accessed using the relevantinformation display menu. SeeInformation Displays (page 75).

Resetting Eco modeReset the average fuel consumption.Note: New values may take a short time tocalculate.

122

Eco Mode

Page 125: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGSStop refuelling after the fuel nozzlestops the second time. Additionalfuel will fill the expansion space in

the fuel tank which could lead to fueloverflowing. Fuel spillage could behazardous to other road users.

Do not use any kind of flames or heatnear the fuel system. The fuel systemis under pressure. There is a risk of

injury if the fuel system is leaking.

FUEL QUALITY - PETROL

CAUTIONDo not use leaded petrol or petrol withadditives containing other metalliccompounds (e.g. manganese-based).

They could damage the emission system.

Note: We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel without additives or otherengine treatments.Use minimum 95 octane unleadedpetrol that meets the specification definedby EN 228, or equivalent.

FUEL QUALITY - E85

WARNINGSDo not modify the fuel systemconfiguration or the components inthe system.Do not replace the fuel system or thecomponents with parts not speciallydesigned to be used with E85.

CAUTIONSDo not use leaded petrol or petrol withadditives containing other metalliccompounds (e.g. manganese-based).

They could damage the emission system.Do not use methanol instead of E85.

Note: We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel without additives or otherengine treatments.Note: When using E85, you may experiencea higher fuel consumption.Note: Your vehicle will operate well oncommercial quality 95 octane unleadedpetrol, but only high quality E85 offers thesame protection and performance.Use minimum 95 octane unleadedpetrol that meets the specification definedby EN 228, or equivalent. You can also usea mixture of unleaded petrol and E85.

Long-term storageDue to small amounts of corrosiveimpurities that may be found in the E85, itis recommended that you fill the tank withonly 95 octane unleaded petrol prior tolong-term storage of your vehicle.

FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL

WARNINGDo not mix diesel with oil, petrol orother liquids. This could cause achemical reaction.

CAUTIONSDo not add kerosene, paraffin orpetrol to diesel. This could causedamage to the fuel system.

123

Fuel and Refuelling

Page 126: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

CAUTIONSUse diesel that meets thespecification defined by EN 590, orthe relevant national specification.

Note: We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel.Note: The use of additives or other enginetreatments not approved by Ford is notrecommended.Note: We do not recommend the prolongeduse of additives intended to prevent fuelwaxing.

Long-term storageMost diesel fuels contain bio-diesel, it isrecommended to fill the tank with purelymineral diesel (where available) or add ananti-oxidant prior to long-term storage ofyour vehicle exceeding two months. Yourdealer can help you with a suitableanti-oxidant.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARNINGDo not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The exhaust

will radiate a considerable amount of heatduring use, and after you have switchedthe engine off. This is a potential firehazard.

Driving with a catalytic converterCAUTIONS

Avoid running out of fuel.

Do not crank the engine for longperiods.Do not run the engine when a sparkplug lead is disconnected.

CAUTIONSDo not push-start or tow-start yourvehicle. Use booster cables. SeeJump-Starting the Vehicle (page

206).Do not switch the ignition off whendriving.

FUEL FILLER FLAP

WARNINGSTake care when refuelling to avoidspilling any residual fuel from the fuelnozzle.Do not use any kind of flames or heatnear the fuel system. The fuel systemis under pressure. There is a risk of

injury if the fuel system is leaking.

CAUTIONIf you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray the fuelfiller flap briefly from a distance not

less than 200 millimetres (8 inches).

Type 1

E135934

124

Fuel and Refuelling

Page 127: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Type 2

E135935

1. Press the flap to open it. Open the flapfully until it engages.

E139202

A

A

Note: When you insert the fuel nozzle, aspring loaded inhibitor will open if thecorrect size nozzle is detected. This helpsto avoid filling up with the wrong fuel.

2. Insert the fuel nozzle up to andincluding the first notch on the nozzleA. Keep it resting on the cover of thefuel pipe opening.

WARNINGStop refuelling after the fuel nozzlestops the second time. Additionalfuel will fill the expansion space in

the fuel tank which could lead to fueloverflowing. Fuel spillage could behazardous to other road users.

E139203

A

B

Incorrect positionACorrect positionB

3. Do not lift the nozzle during refilling. Thiscan affect the flow of fuel and shut off ofthe fuel nozzle before the fuel tank is full.

125

Fuel and Refuelling

Page 128: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Type 1

E139204

Type 2

E139205

4. Operate the nozzle within the areashown.

WARNINGSWe recommend that you remove thefuel nozzle slowly to allow anyresidual fuel to drain into the fuel

tank. Alternatively you can wait 10 secondsbefore removing the fuel nozzle.

Do not remove the nozzle from itsfully inserted position during theentire refuelling process.

E119081

5. Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to removeit.

Refuelling with a fuel canUse the funnel which is located in the glovebox.

REFUELLING

CAUTIONDo not attempt to start the engine ifyou have filled the fuel tank with theincorrect fuel. This could damage the

engine. Have the system checked by aproperly trained technician immediately.

REFUELLING - E85

CAUTIONDo not attempt to start the engine ifyou have filled the fuel tank with theincorrect fuel. This could damage the

engine. Have the system checked by aproperly trained technician immediately.

After refuelling, allow 5 minutes of normalengine operation above 48 km/h (30 mph)to reduce the risk of an increased enginerestart time.

126

Fuel and Refuelling

Page 129: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

FUEL CONSUMPTIONThe CO2 and fuel consumption figures arederived from laboratory tests according toEEC Directive 80/1268/EEC andsubsequent amendments and are carriedout by all vehicle manufacturers.

They are intended as a comparisonbetween makes and models of vehicles.They are not intended to represent the realworld fuel consumption you may get fromyour vehicle. Real world fuel consumptionis governed by many factors including;driving style, high speed driving, stop/startdriving, air conditioning usage, theaccessories fitted and towing etc.Your Ford dealer can give you advice onimproving your fuel consumption.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FocusFuel Consumption Figures

CO2 Emis-sionsCombinedExtra-UrbanUrban

Variantg/kml/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)

1365.9 (47.9)4.7 (60.1)8 (35.3)1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT -Sigma Stage V, 5-door, allexcept vehicles with DPS6automatic transmission

1396 (47.1)4.8 (58.9)8.1 (34.9)

1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT -Sigma Stage V, 4-door andestate, all except vehicleswith DPS6 automatic trans-mission

1496.4 (44.1)4.8 (58.9)9.3 (30.4)1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT -Sigma Stage V, vehicleswith DPS6 automatic trans-mission

1446.2 (45.6)5 (56.5)8.3 (34)1.6L EcoBoost - SigmaStage V, vehicles withoutstart-stop

1396 (47.1)5 (56.5)7.7 (36.7)1.6L EcoBoost - SigmaStage V, vehicles with start-stop

127

Fuel and Refuelling

Page 130: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

CO2 Emis-sionsCombinedExtra-UrbanUrban

Variantg/kml/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)

1496.7 (42.2)5 (56.5)9.6 (29.4)2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4Stage V, vehicles withmanual transmission

1566.4 (44.1)4.9 (57.6)9.1 (31)2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4Stage V, vehicles with auto-matic transmission

1174.5 (62.8)3.7 (76.3)5.7 (49.6)1.6L Duratorq-TDCi - DVStage V, vehicles withoutstart-stop

1094.2 (67.3)3.7 (76.3)5.1 (55.4)1.6L Duratorq-TDCi - DVStage V, vehicles with start-stop

1295 (56.5)4.2 (67.3)6.3 (44.8)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DWStage V, vehicles withmanual transmission

1395.3 (53.3)4.4 (64.2)6.8 (41.5)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DWStage V, vehicles with auto-matic transmission

128

Fuel and Refuelling

Page 131: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

MANUAL TRANSMISSIONSelecting reverse gear

CAUTIONDo not engage reverse gear when thevehicle is moving. This can causedamage to the transmission.

E99067

On some vehicles it is necessary to raisethe collar whilst selecting reverse gear.

Vehicles with 5-speed transmission

CAUTIONFully depress the clutch pedal andwait for three seconds before youselect reverse gear.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONSelector lever positions

E133124

ParkPReverseRNeutralNDriveDSport mode and manual shiftingSManual shift up+Manual shift down-

WARNINGApply the brakes before moving theselector lever and keep them applieduntil you are ready to move off.

Press the button on the selector lever tochange to each position.The selector lever position will be shownin the information display.

Park

WARNINGSSelect park only when your vehicleis stationary.

129

Transmission

Page 132: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

WARNINGSApply the parking brake andselect park before leaving yourvehicle. Make sure that the selector

lever is latched in position.

Note: An audible warning will sound if youopen the driver's door and you have notselected park.In this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels and the transmissionis locked. You can start the engine with theselector lever in this position.

Reverse

WARNINGSSelect reverse only when your vehicleis stationary and the engine is at idlespeed.Always come to a complete stopbefore shifting out of reverse.

Select reverse to allow the vehicle to movebackwards.

NeutralIn this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels but the transmission isnot locked. You can start the engine withthe selector lever in this position.

DriveNote: A shift will occur only when thevehicle speed and the engine speed areappropriate.Note: You may temporarily override thecurrent gear selected using the + and -buttons.Select drive to shift automatically throughthe forward gears.

The transmission will select theappropriate gear for optimum performancebased on ambient temperature, roadgradient, vehicle load and driver input.

Sport mode and manual shiftingSport ModeNote: In Sport mode the transmissionoperates as normal but gears are selectedmore quickly and at higher engine speeds.Note: In Sport mode S will be displayed onthe instrument panel.Activate Sport mode by moving theselector lever to position S. Sport modewill remain active until either you shiftmanually up or down the gears using + and-, or return the selector lever to position D.

Manual shifting

WARNINGDo not hold the buttons permanentlyin – or +.

CAUTIONThe transmission will automaticallydownshift when the engine speed istoo low.

Press the - button to shift down and pressthe + button to shift up.Gears may be skipped by pressing thebuttons repeatedly at short intervals.Manual mode also provides a kickdownfunction. See Kickdown.

Hints on driving with an automatictransmission

CAUTIONDo not idle the engine for long periodsof time in drive with the brakesapplied.

130

Transmission

Page 133: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Moving off1. Release the parking brake.2. Release the brake pedal and press the

accelerator pedal.

Stopping1. Release the accelerator pedal and

press the brake pedal.2. Apply the parking brake.3. Select neutral or park.

KickdownPress the accelerator pedal fully with theselector lever in the drive position to selectthe next lowest gear for optimumperformance. Release the acceleratorpedal when you no longer requirekickdown.

Emergency park position releaseleverUse the lever to move the selector leverfrom the park position in the event of anelectrical malfunction or if your vehicle hasa flat battery.

E13312813 2

1. Carefully remove the cover.2. Remove the retaining clip.3. Remove the centre console side panel.

E133129

4

Note: The lever is white.4. Apply the brake pedal. Using a suitable

tool press and hold the lever forwardwhile pulling the selector lever out ofthe park position and into the neutralposition.

131

Transmission

Page 134: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONNote: Depending on applicable laws andregulations in the country for which yourvehicle was originally built, the brake lampsmay flash if you brake heavily.Note: Occasional brake noise is normal andoften does not indicate a concern. In normaloperation, the system may emit occasionalor intermittent squeal or groan noises whenthe brakes are applied. Such noises areusually caused by environmental conditionssuch as cold, heat, moisture, road dust, saltor mud.

Disc brakesWet brake discs result in reduced brakingefficiency. Dab the brake pedal whendriving from a car wash to remove the filmof water.

ABSWARNING

The ABS does not relieve you of yourresponsibility to drive with due careand attention.

The ABS helps you to maintain full steeringand directional stability when you brakeheavily in an emergency, by preventing theroad wheels from locking.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITHANTI-LOCK BRAKESWhen the ABS is operating, the brake pedalwill pulse. This is normal. Maintain pressureon the brake pedal.The ABS will not eliminate the dangersinherent when:• you drive too close to the vehicle in

front of you.• the vehicle is aquaplaning.

• you take corners too fast.• the road surface is poor.

PARKING BRAKE

WARNINGVehicles with an automatictransmission should always be leftwith the selector lever in position P

(Park).

• Press the foot brake pedal firmly.• Pull the parking brake lever up smartly

to its fullest extent.• Do not press the release button while

pulling the lever up.• If your vehicle is parked on a hill and

facing uphill, select first gear or P(Park) and turn the steering wheelaway from the kerb.

• If your vehicle is parked on a hill andfacing downhill, select reverse gear orP (Park) and turn the steering wheeltowards the kerb.

To release the parking brake, press thebrake pedal firmly, pull the lever up slightly,depress the release button and push thelever down.

132

Brakes

Page 135: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONElectronic stability programme(ESP)

WARNINGESP does not relieve you of yourresponsibility to drive with due careand attention.

E72903

A A

AB

B

B

B

without ESPAwith ESPB

The ESP supports stability when thevehicle starts to slide away from yourintended path. This is performed by brakingindividual wheels and reducing enginetorque as needed.The system also provides an enhancedtraction control function by reducingengine torque and may brake individualwheels if they spin when you accelerate.This improves your ability to pull away onslippery roads or loose surfaces, andimproves comfort by limiting wheel spin inhairpin bends.

Stability control (ESP) warning lampThe ESP warning lamp will flash when thesystem is operating. See Warning Lampsand Indicators (page 71).

Emergency brake assistWARNING

Emergency brake assist does notrelieve you of your responsibility todrive with due care and attention.

Emergency brake assist will detect whenyou brake heavily by measuring the rate atwhich you press the brake pedal. It willprovide maximum braking efficiency aslong as you press the pedal. Emergencybrake assist can reduce stopping distancesin critical situations.

Trailer stability controlWARNING

Trailer stability control does notrelieve you of your responsibility totow with due care and attention.

Trailer stability control is an enhancedfeature of ESP, and automatically detectswhen an attached trailer starts to sway.If this situation occurs, the system willautomatically brake individual wheels tostabilise the trailer and vehicle. In case avery severe sway is detected, the enginetorque will be reduced and the vehicle willbe slowed automatically.

USING STABILITY CONTROLNote: The system will be switched onautomatically every time you switch theignition on.To turn the system off and on. SeeInformation Displays (page 75).

133

Stability Control

Page 136: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe system makes it easier to pull awaywhen the vehicle is on a slope without theneed to use the parking brake.When the system is active, the vehicle willremain stationary on the slope for a shorttime after you release the brake pedal.During this time, you have time to moveyour foot from the brake to the acceleratorpedal and pull away. The brakes arereleased automatically once the enginehas developed sufficient drive to preventthe vehicle from rolling down the slope.This is an advantage when pulling awayon a slope, for example from a car parkramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphillinto a parking space.

WARNINGThe system does not replace theparking brake. When you leave thevehicle, always apply the parking

brake and select first or reverse gear.

USING HILL START ASSISTThe system is activated automaticallywhen you stop your vehicle on a slopegreater than 3%. The system operates withthe vehicle facing downhill if reverse gearis selected and with the vehicle facinguphill if any forward gear is selected.

Vehicles with manualtransmission onlyThe system can be switched on and offusing the information display. See GeneralInformation (page 75).

Activating the systemWARNINGS

You must remain in the vehicle onceyou have activated the system.

WARNINGSAt all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening, if

required.If a malfunction is detected when thesystem is active, the system will bedeactivated and a message will be

shown in the display. See InformationMessages (page 83).

You can activate the system only if thefollowing conditions have been met:• The engine is running.• The system is switched on.• On vehicles with manual transmission,

the clutch pedal is pressed.• No failure mode is present.

To activate the system:1. Press the brake pedal to bring the

vehicle to a complete standstill. Keepthe brake pedal depressed.

2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle ison a slope the system will be activatedautomatically.

3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, the vehicle will remain onthe slope without rolling away for ashort time. This hold time willautomatically be extended if you arein the process of driving off.

4. Drive off in the normal manner. Thebrakes will be released automatically.

Deactivating the systemTo deactivate the system, perform one ofthe following:

134

Hill Start Assist

Page 137: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

• Wait for a short time until the systemdeactivates automatically.

• If a forward gear was selected whenthe system became active, selectreverse gear.

• If reverse gear was selected when thesystem became active, select aforward gear.

135

Hill Start Assist

Page 138: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

CAUTIONSVehicles fitted with a trailer towmodule not approved by us may notcorrectly detect obstacles.The sensors may not detect objectsin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.The sensors may not detect objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonicwaves.The parking aid does not detectobstacles moving away from thevehicle. They will only be detected

shortly after they start to move towardsthe vehicle again.

If you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray thesensors briefly from a distance not

less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).Parking aid sends tones via the audiosystem fitted and approved by us. Ifthis is not working the parking aid

system will not work.

Note: On vehicles fitted with a tow ballarm, the rear parking aid is deactivatedautomatically when any trailer lamps (orlighting boards) are connected to the 13-pinsocket via a trailer tow module we haveapproved.Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, iceand snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.Note: The parking aid may emit false tonesif it detects a signal using the samefrequency as the sensors or if the vehicle isfully laden.

Note: The outer sensors may detect theside walls of a garage. If the distancebetween the outer sensor and the side wallremains constant for three seconds, thetone will switch off. As you continue, theinner sensors will detect rearward objects.

USING THE PARKING AID -VEHICLES WITH: REARPARKING AID

WARNINGThe parking aid does not relieve youof your responsibility to drive withdue care and attention.

E77927

The parking aid is automatically activatedwhen you select reverse gear with theignition switched on.You will hear an intermittent tone at adistance of approximately 150 centimetres(59 inches) between the obstacle and rearbumper and approximately 50 centimetres(20 inches) to the side. Decreasing thedistance accelerates the intermittent tone.

136

Parking Aids

Page 139: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E130178

A

Distance Indicator.A

As the distance decreases the indicatormoves towards the vehicle.A continuous tone will start at a distanceof less than 30 centimetres (11 inches) tothe rear bumper.Note: On Vehicles with a tow bar fitted andapproved by us the continuous tone willstart at a distance of 45 centimetres (18inches) from the rear bumper.

E130179

A

Malfunction indicator.ANote: If a malfunction is indicated thesystem will be disabled. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technician.

E130180

A trailer symbol indicates there is a trailerattached and the system is disabled.

USING THE PARKING AID -VEHICLES WITH: FRONT ANDREAR PARKING AID

WARNINGThe parking aid does not relieve youof your responsibility to drive withdue care and attention.

Switching the parking aid on andoffThe parking aid is per default off. To switchthe parking aid on, select reverse gear orpress the switch in the instrument panel.For item location: See At a Glance (page10).The light in the switch illuminates whenthe parking aid is activated.To turn it off, press the switch again.

137

Parking Aids

Page 140: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Manoeuvring with the parking aid

E130381

A B

D C

1

2

Reverse gear selected1Neutral or forward gear selected2Display and toneADisplay and toneBDisplay onlyCDisplay and toneD

You will hear an intermittent tone at adistance of approximately 150 centimetres(59 inches) between the obstacle and rearbumper, approximately 80 centimetres (31inches) between the obstacle and frontbumper and approximately 50 centimetres(20 inches) to the side. Decreasing thedistance accelerates the intermittent tone.A continuous tone will start at a distanceof less than 30 centimetres (11 inches) tothe front or rear bumper.Note: On vehicles with a tow bar fitted andapproved by us the continuous tone willstart at a distance of 45 centimetres (18inches) from the rear bumper.

You will hear an alternating tone from thefront and rear if obstacles are closer than30 centimetres (11 inches) to the front andrear bumpers.

E130382

A

Distance Indicator.A

As the distance decreases the indicatormoves towards the vehicle.

E130383

A

Malfuction indicator.ANote: If a malfunction is indicated thesystem will be disabled. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technician.

138

Parking Aids

Page 141: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E130180

A trailer symbol indicates there is a trailerattached and the rear sensors are disabled.

139

Parking Aids

Page 142: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe camera is a visual aid for use whenreversing.

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

CAUTIONSIf you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray thecamera briefly from a distance not

less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).Do not apply pressure to the camera.

Note: Keep the camera free from dirt, iceand snow. Do not clean with sharp objects,degreaser, wax or organic products. Use onlya soft cloth.During operation, guide lines appear in thedisplay which represent your vehicle's pathand approximate distance from rearwardobjects.

USING THE REAR VIEWCAMERA

WARNINGSThe operation of the camera mayvary depending on the ambienttemperature, vehicle and road

conditions.The distances shown in the displaymay differ from the actual distance.Do not place objects in front of thecamera.

The camera is located on the luggagecompartment lid near the handle.

E99105

Activating the rear view cameraCAUTION

The camera may not detect objectsthat are close to the vehicle.

With the ignition and the audio unitswitched on:1. Press the parking aid switch in the

instrument panel. For item location:See At a Glance (page 10). Or,

2. Engage reverse gear.The image is displayed on the screen.The lamp in the switch illuminates whenthe system is activated.The camera may not operate correctly inthe following conditions:• Dark areas.• Intense light.• If the ambient temperature increases

or decreases rapidly.• If the camera is wet, for example in rain

or high humidity.• If the camera's view is obstructed, for

example by mud.

140

Rear view camera

Page 143: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Using the displayCAUTIONS

Obstacles above the camera positionwill not be shown. Inspect the areabehind your vehicle if necessary.Marks are for general guidance only,and are calculated for vehicles inmaximum load conditions on an even

road surface.

The lines show a projected vehicle path(based on the current steering wheelangle) and the distance from the exteriormirrors and rear bumper.

E99458

A

B

C

D E

A

B

C

D

Exterior mirror clearance - 0.1metre (4 inches)

A

Red - up to 0.3 (12 inches)BAmber - 0.3 - 0.6 metre (12 - 24inches)

C

141

Rear view camera

Page 144: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Green - 0.6 - 0.9 metre (24 - 35inches)

D

Amber - centre line of theprojected vehicle path

E

Note: The green line is extended from 0.9metre (35 inches) up to a distance of 3.2metres (126 inches).Note: When reversing with a trailer, the lineson the screen are not shown. The camerawill show the vehicle direction and not thetrailer.

Deactivating the rear view cameraNote: Disengage reverse gear. The displaywill stay on for a short period beforeswitching off.Note: The system will automatically switchoff once the vehicle speed has reachedapproximately 15 km/h (9 mph).Press the parking aid switch in theinstrument panel. For item location: SeeAt a Glance (page 10).

Vehicles with parking aidThe display will additionally show acoloured distance bar. This guide indicatesthe distance from the rear bumper to thedetected obstacle.These are colour coded as follows:• Green - 0.6 to 1.8 metres (24 - 71

inches).• Amber - 0.3 to 0.6 metre (12 - 24

inches).• Red - 0.3 metre (12 inches) or less.

142

Rear view camera

Page 145: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if

required.You must observe that the selectedspace remains clear of obstructionsat all times in the manoeuver.Vehicles with overhanging loads,street furniture and other items maynot be detected by the system. You

must make sure that the selected spaceis suitable for parking.

Do not use the system if a trailer isattached to the vehicle.Do not use the system if a bike rackis attached to the back of the vehicle.Do not use the system if anoverhanging item is attached to theroof.If the manoeuvre is interruptedbefore completion, the system willbe disabled. The steering wheel

position will not indicate the true positionof the steering and you will have to takecontrol of the vehicle.

Make sure that loose clothing, yourhands or your arms do not get caughtin the rotating steering wheel.

The system will detect a suitable parallelparking space and steer the vehicle intothe space. The system controls thesteering while the driver controls theaccelerator, transmission and brakes. Themanoeuvre can be stopped at any time byholding the steering wheel or pressing theactive park assist switch. See At a Glance(page 10).The system will visually and audiblyinstruct the driver throughout theprocedure to safely park the vehicle.

USING ACTIVE PARK ASSIST

CAUTIONSThe sensors may not detect objectsin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.The sensors may not detect objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonicwaves.The sensors may not detect the kerb.

Note: If the traction control system isdisabled active park assist will not beavailable. See General Information (page75).The system will not align the vehiclecorrectly if:• a spare tyre, or a tyre worn significantly

more than the other tyres is used• the factory installed tyre size is not

used on the vehicle• the tyres skid• you allow the vehicle to roll• the weather conditions are poor (heavy

rain, snow, fog, etc).

143

Active Park Assist

Page 146: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Move forwards at a maximum speed of 30km/h (18 mph). Press the active park assistswitch. See At a Glance (page 10). Usethe direction indicator lever to selectsearching either to the left-hand side orright-hand side of the vehicle.

Note: If no selection is made via thedirection indicator lever the system willdefault to the passenger side of the vehicle.

A

E130107

Note: To disable the chimes: SeePersonalised Settings (page 82).The information and entertainment displaywill inform you and a chime will be heardwhen a suitable space is found. To parkthe vehicle, follow the instructions on theinformation and entertainment display.

Note: The arrow symbols or graphics in thedisplay indicate on which side of the vehiclethe system will park. The display will alsoadvise you when to select reverse gear.Slow down and stop at approximatelyposition A, then follow the systeminstructions.

E130108

WARNINGIf a speed of 10 km/h (6 mph) isexceeded the system will be disabledand you will need to take full control

of the vehicle.

Move the vehicle backwards cautiouslyusing the accelerator and brake pedals tocontrol the vehicle. Parking aid warningtones will sound. Stop the vehicle whenyou hear a continuous tone.

144

Active Park Assist

Page 147: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

You can take control of the manoeuvre byholding the steering wheel. A message mayappear that the system can be resumed.To accept this message press the activepark assist switch. See At a Glance (page10).

E130109

Move the vehicle forwards. Stop thevehicle when you hear a continuous tone.Repeat the above steps until the vehicle issatisfactory parked. The display willindicate when the system has finished themanoeuvre.

145

Active Park Assist

Page 148: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

Cruise control allows you to control yourspeed using the switches on the steeringwheel. You can use cruise control whenyou exceed approximately 30 km/h (20mph).

USING CRUISE CONTROL

WARNINGDo not use cruise control in heavytraffic, on twisty roads or when theroad surface is slippery.

Switching cruise control on

E130072

Note: The system is ready for you to set aspeed.

Setting a speedPress the SET+ switch or the SET- switchto store and maintain your current speed.The cruise control indicator will illuminate.See Warning Lamps and Indicators(page 71).

Changing the set speedWARNING

When you are going downhill, yourspeed may increase above the setspeed. The system will not apply the

brakes. Change down a gear and press theSET- switch to assist the system inmaintaining the set speed.

Note: If you accelerate by pressing theaccelerator pedal, the set speed will notchange. When you release the acceleratorpedal, you will return to the speed that youpreviously set.

E130073

A

B

AccelerateADecelerateB

Cancelling the set speedPress the brake pedal or pull the CANswitch.

146

Cruise Control

Page 149: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: The system will no longer controlyour speed. The cruise control indicator willnot illuminate but the system will retain thespeed that you previously set.

Resuming the set speedPull the RES switch.The cruise control indicator will illuminateand the system will attempt to resume thespeed that you previously set.

Switching cruise control off

E130072

The system will not retain the speed thatyou previously set. The cruise controlindicator will not illuminate.

147

Cruise Control

Page 150: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGSThe system is not a collision warningor avoidance system. The separateforward alert function provides a

collision warning and mitigation feature.See Forward alert function (page 152).You must intervene if the system does notdetect a vehicle in front.

When driving you are responsible formaintaining the correct distance andspeed, even when adaptive cruise

control is used. You must always payattention to the traffic conditions andintervene when adaptive cruise control isnot maintaining a suitable speed orsuitable distance.

The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.The system does not brake for slowor stationary vehicles, pedestrians,objects in the road, oncoming and

crossing vehicles.

CAUTIONSOnly use adaptive cruise control whenconditions are favourable, for exampleon motorways and main roads with

steady free flowing traffic.Do not use in poor visibility,specifically fog, heavy rain, spray orsnow.Do not use on icy or slippery roads.

Do not use the system when enteringor leaving a motorway.The radar sensor has a limited field ofvision. In some situations it maydetect a vehicle other than the one

expected or not detect any vehicle at all.

Note: When adaptive cruise control isactivated, you may hear some unusualsounds during automatic braking. This isnormal and caused by the automaticbraking system.Note: Keep the front of the vehicle freefrom dirt, metal badges or objects, includingvehicle front protectors and additional lightswhich may prevent the sensor fromoperating.The system is designed to help youmaintain a gap from the vehicle ahead ora set road speed if there is no slowervehicle ahead. The system is intended toprovide enhanced operation of the vehiclewhen following other vehicles which are inthe same lane and travelling in the samedirection.The system is based on the use of a radarsensor which projects a beam directlyforward of the vehicle. This beam willdetect any vehicle ahead within thesystem's range.The radar sensor is mounted behind thefront grille.

148

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Page 151: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Detection beam issues

E71621

Detection issues can occur:• With vehicles that edge into your lane

that can only be detected once theyhave moved fully into your lane (A).Motorcycles may be detected late, ornot at all. (B)

• With vehicles in front when going intoand coming out of a bend (C). Thedetection beam will not follow sharpcurves in the road.

In these cases the system may brake lateor unexpectedly. You should stay alert andintervene if necessary.

Automatic braking with ACCWARNINGS

You must take immediate actiononce alerted, as the adaptive cruisecontrol braking will not be sufficient

to keep a safe distance to the vehicle infront.

In some cases there may be nowarning or the warning may bedelayed. You should always apply

the brakes when necessary.When following a vehicle in front ofyou, adaptive cruise control will notautomatically decelerate to a stop.

The system will automatically brake foryou, if required to maintain the set gapbetween your vehicle and the one detectedin front. This braking capacity is limited toapproximately 30% of the total manualbraking capacity to ensure smooth andcomfortable cruising. If the car needs tobrake more heavily than this, and you donot intervene by braking manually, analarm will sound and a warning symbol willbe displayed in the cluster.

149

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Page 152: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

USING ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROLThe system is operated by adjustmentcontrols mounted on the steering wheel.

E133195

A

B

F

CD

E

Set speed increaseASet speed decreaseBACC on/offCACC gap increaseDACC gap decreaseEACC cancel/resumeF

Switching the system onPress switch C. The system is set tostandby mode.

Setting a speedNote: The system must be in standbymode.Press switch A or switch B to select yourdesired cruise speed. The speed isdisplayed in the information display andstored as the set speed.

Changing the set speedNote: Vehicle speed may be increased anddecreased at intervals of 5 km/h or 5 mph.Note: If the system does not react to thesechanges the reason may be that the gapinterval to the vehicle in front prevents anincrease in speed.Press switch A to increase or switch B todecrease the set speed until the desiredset speed is shown in the informationdisplay. The vehicle speed will graduallychange to the selected speed.

Setting the vehicle gapCAUTION

Use the appropriate gap setting inaccordance with local trafficregulations.

Note: The gap setting is time dependentand therefore the distance willautomatically adjust with your speed. Forexample on a gap setting of four bars, thetime gap is 1.8 seconds. This will mean thatat a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph), thedistance to the vehicle in front will bemaintained at 50 metres (164 feet).Note: If the accelerator is depressed for ashort period, for example when overtaking,the system is temporarily deactivated andthen reactivated when the accelerator pedalis released. A message is displayed in theinformation display.Note: The gap setting will remainunchanged during ignition cycles.

E82311

150

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Page 153: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

The distance between you and the vehicledetected in front is maintained by avariable setting. There are five steps whichare represented by horizontal barsdisplayed in the information display. Onebar indicates the smallest gap and fivebars indicates the largest gap. These barsare shown empty when in standby modeand filled when in active mode.If no vehicle is detected in front, then onlyyour vehicle is displayed in the informationdisplay below the bars. The system willmaintain the set speed when conditionspermit. The set gap is maintained anddisplayed.If a vehicle is detected by the sensor, thedisplay will show another vehicle abovethe horizontal bars:

E82312

This is a follow mode, and the system willaccelerate or decelerate as necessary tomaintain the set gap.Pull switch E to decrease the gap or switchD to increase the gap. The gap selectedwill be represented by the number of barsin the display.Note: The recommended gap setting is fouror five bars.

Temporarily deactivating thesystemNote: The system is cancelled when thegear lever is moved to a neutral position orif the accelerator pedal or clutch isdepressed for a long period of time.

Press the brake pedal or pull switch F tocancel the system. The system will returnto standby mode allowing you full manualcontrol of the vehicle. The set speed andgap setting are retained in the memory.Pull switch F again to resume. The systemwill resume with the previously set speedand vehicle gap setting if conditions permit.

Switching the system offPress switch C to turn the system off.Note: When deactivating the system bypressing switch C, the stored speed is notretained.

Automatic deactivationNote: If the engine speed drops too low, amessage is displayed in the informationdisplay instructing you to change down agear (manual transmission only). If you donot follow this recommendation then thesystem will go into automatic deactivationmode.Note: The system will not operate iftraction control has been switched off.The system is dependent on various othersafety systems, for example ABS and ESP.If any of these systems are malfunctioningor reacting to an emergency, the system isautomatically deactivated.In the event of automatic deactivation asignal will sound and the message isdisplayed in the information display. SeeInformation Messages (page 83). Youmust then intervene and adapt your drivingand speed to vehicles in front.An automatic deactivation can be due tothe:• vehicle speed falling below 30 km/h

(20 mph)• wheels losing traction

151

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Page 154: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

• brake temperature being too high, forexample when driving on mountainousor hilly roads

• engine speed being too low• radar sensor being covered• parking brake being applied.

FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION

WARNINGSNever wait for a collision warning.When driving you are responsible formaintaining the correct distance and

speed, even when the system is used.The system will only react to vehiclesin front travelling in the samedirection and will not react to slow

or stationary vehicles.Never drive in a manner to provokethe system. The system is designedto assist in emergencies only.

CAUTIONSWarnings may be triggered late, beabsent or triggered unnecessarily dueto detection beam issues. See

Principle of Operation (page 148).The system uses the same radarsensors as adaptive cruise control andtherefore has the same limitations.

See Principle of Operation (page 148).

Note: The brake support system onlyreduces the collision speed if you brakeimmediately once alerted.Note: If the brake pedal is depressedsufficiently quickly then braking isimplemented with full brake function, evenif the force on the pedal is light.Note: Brake support prepares the brakesystem for rapid braking and the brakes areapplied gently, which may be noticed as aslight jerk.

Note: The collision alerts will only occur ifthe system is switched on, however thebrake support is always on and cannot beturned off.Note: The system may be used with orwithout the Adaptive cruise control systembeing activated.The system assists you by warning of therisk of a collision with a vehicle in front.The system alerts you by warning chimesand a visual warning in the informationdisplay. See Information Messages(page 83).Brake support is activated to enable fullbraking effectiveness, and reduce theseverity of a collision with the vehicle infront.

Switching the system on and offNote: When the system is switched off, awarning indicator will remain illuminated inthe information display. See WarningLamps and Indicators (page 71).Note: The system status and settings willremain unchanged during ignition cycles.The system can be switched on and offusing the information display. See GeneralInformation (page 75).

Adjusting the warning sensitivityYou may adjust the system warningsensitivity using the buttons on the steeringwheel. See General Information (page75). This controls how early the visual andaudible warning is activated.

152

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Page 155: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGWhen you are going downhill, yourspeed may increase above the setspeed. The system will not apply the

brakes but a warning will be given.

The system allows you to set a speed, towhich the vehicle then becomes limited.The set speed will become the effectivemaximum speed of the vehicle, but withthe option to temporarily exceed this limitif required.

USING THE SPEED LIMITERNote: The set speed limit can beintentionally exceeded for a short period ifrequired, for example when overtaking.The system is operated by adjustmentcontrols mounted on the steering wheel.

E133198

A

B

C

D

Set speed increaseASpeed limiter on/offBSet speed decreaseCSpeed limiter cancel/resumeD

Switching the system on and offPress switch B. The information displaywill prompt for a speed to be set.

Setting the speed limitUse the cruise control switches to alter themaximum speed setting.Press switch A or switch C to select yourdesired speed limit. The speed is displayedin the information display and stored asthe set speed.Pull switch D to cancel the limiter andplace it in standby mode. The informationdisplay will confirm deactivation byshowing the set speed crossed out.Pull switch D again to resume the limiter.The information display will confirm thesystem is active by showing the set speedagain.

Intentionally exceeding the setspeed limitDepress the accelerator fully to temporarilydeactivate the system. The system willreactivate once the vehicle speed dropsbelow the set speed.

System warningsIf the set limit is accidentally exceeded, forexample driving downhill, the informationdisplay will show the set speed flashingtogether with an audible warning chime.If the set limit is intentionally exceeded theinformation display will show the set speedcrossed out.

153

Speed Limiter

Page 156: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if

required.If the sensor becomes blocked thesystem may not function.Take regular rest breaks as requiredand do not wait for the system towarn you if you feel tired.Take rest breaks only where it is safeto do so.Certain driving styles and behaviourmay result in the system issuing awarning even if you are not feeling

tired.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weather conditionsthe system may not function. Rain,snow, spray and large contrasts in

lighting can all influence the sensor.The system will not operate if thesensor cannot track the road lanemarkings.The system may not operate in areasduring roadworks construction.The system may not operate on roadswith sharp bends or narrow lanes.Do not carry out windscreen repairs inthe immediate area surrounding thesensor.If your vehicle is fitted with asuspension kit not approved by us, thesystem may not function correctly.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings, insectsand snow or ice.Note: The system is intended as a driver aidwhen driving on fast main roads andmotorways.Note: The system calculates an alertnesslevel at vehicle speeds above approximately65 km/h (40 mph).The system automatically monitors yourdriving behaviour using various inputsincluding the front camera sensor.If the system detects that you arebecoming drowsy or there is a deteriorationin your driving, the system will alert you.

USING DRIVER ALERTSwitching the system on and offNote: The system status will remainunchanged during ignition cycles.Activate the system using the informationdisplay. See Information Displays (page75).Once activated the system will calculateyour alertness level based upon yourdriving behaviour in relation to the lanemarkings, and other factors.

System warningsNote: The system will not issue warningsbelow approximately 65 km/h (40 mph).The warning system is in two stages. Atfirst the system issues a temporary warningthat a rest should be taken. This messagewill only appear for a short time. If a rest isnot then taken a further warning may beissued which will remain in the informationdisplay until cancelled. See InformationMessages (page 83).Press OK on the steering wheel control toremove the warning.

154

Driver Alert

Page 157: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

System displayWhen active the system will runautomatically in the background and onlyissue warnings if required. You can viewthe status at any time using theinformation display. See GeneralInformation (page 75).The alertness level is shown by six stepsas a coloured bar.

E131358

Alertness level is fine, no rest required.

E131359

Alertness level is critical, indicating that arest should be taken as soon as safelypossible.The status bar will travel from left to rightas the calculated alertness leveldecreases. As the rest icon is approachedthe colour turns from green to yellow andthen finally red when a rest break must betaken.• Green - No rest required.• Yellow - First (temporary) warning.• Red - Second warning.Note: The alertness level will be shown ingrey if the camera sensor cannot track theroad lane markings or if the vehicle speeddrops below approximately 65 km/h (40mph).

Resetting the systemYou can reset the system by either:• Switching the ignition off and on.• Stopping the vehicle and then opening

and closing the driver's door.

155

Driver Alert

Page 158: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if

required.If the sensor becomes blocked thesystem may not function.Lane markings may not always beproperly tracked by the sensor. Otherstructures or objects may sometimes

be incorrectly detected as a lane marking,resulting in a false or missed warning.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weather conditionsthe system may not function. Rain,snow, spray and large contrasts in

lighting can all influence the sensor.The system will not operate if thesensor cannot track the road lanemarkings.The system may not operate in areasduring roadworks construction.The system may not operate on roadswith sharp bends or narrow lanes.Do not carry out windscreen repairs inthe immediate area surrounding thesensor.If your vehicle is fitted with asuspension kit not approved by us, thesystem may not function correctly.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings, insectsand snow or ice.

Note: The system is intended as a driver aidwhen driving on fast main roads andmotorways.Note: The system may not operate duringhard braking or acceleration and, when youare intentionally steering the vehicle.Note: The system will operate with aminimum of one tracked lane marking.Note: The system will only operate abovevehicle speeds of approximately 65 km/h(40 mph).A sensor is mounted behind the interiorrear view mirror. It continuously monitorsconditions to alert you of unintentionallane drifting at high speeds.The system will automatically detect andtrack the lane markings on the road. If itdetects that the vehicle is unintentionallydrifting towards the lane boundaries thena visual warning will be displayed in theinformation display. There is also a warninggiven in the form of a vibration felt throughthe steering wheel.

USING LANE DEPARTUREWARNINGSwitching the system on and offNote: When the system is switched off, awarning indicator will remain illuminated inthe information display. See WarningLamps and Indicators (page 71).Note: The system status and settings willremain unchanged during ignition cycles.

E132099

156

Lane Departure Warning

Page 159: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Activate and deactivate the system usingthe button on the indicator stalk.Press the button to turn the system off.Press the button twice to turn the systemon.

Setting the steering wheelvibration levelThe system has three intensity levels whichcan be set using the information display.See General Information (page 75).

Setting the system sensitivityYou can adjust how quickly the systemwarns you of a dangerous situation. Thesystem has two sensitivity levels which canbe set using the information display. SeeGeneral Information (page 75).

System warnings

E132651

A column of lane markings is displayedeither side of the vehicle graphic.

The lane markings are colour coded asfollows:• Green - The system is ready to warn

you of any unintentional lanedeparture.

• Red - The vehicle is approaching or istoo close to the detected laneboundary. Take immediate safe actionto reposition the vehicle.

• Grey - The relevant lane boundary willbe suppressed.

Instances where a lane boundary may besuppressed:• Lane markings on the road may not be

detected by the sensor.• The direction indicator for that side of

the vehicle is on.• During hard acceleration and braking,

or if direct steering is applied.• Vehicle speed is outside the operating

limits• If there is an ABS or Stability Control

(ESP) intervention.• Narrow lane width.If the lane markings turn red or a vibrationis felt through the steering wheel you musttake immediate and safe action to alignthe vehicle and correct any unintendedlane drift.

157

Lane Departure Warning

Page 160: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if

required.If the sensor becomes blocked thesystem may not function.Lane markings may not always beproperly tracked by the sensor. Otherstructures or objects may sometimes

be incorrectly detected as a lane marking,resulting in a false or missed warning inconjunction with a false or missed steeringintervention.

Always have your hands on thesteering wheel in case you need tooverrule the system.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weather conditionsthe system may not function. Rain,snow, spray and large contrasts in

lighting can all influence the sensor.The system will not operate if thesensor cannot track the road lanemarkings.The system may not operate in areasduring roadworks construction.The system may not operate on roadswith sharp bends or narrow lanes.Do not carry out windscreen repairs inthe immediate area surrounding thesensor.If your vehicle is fitted with asuspension kit not approved by us, thesystem may not function correctly.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings, insectsand snow or ice.Note: The system is intended as a driver aidwhen driving on fast main roads andmotorways.Note: The system may not operate duringhard braking or acceleration and when youare intentionally steering the vehicle.Note: The system will operate with aminimum of one tracked lane marking.Note: The system will only operatebetween vehicle speeds of approximately65 km/h (40 mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph).Note: If the system does not detect anactive steering input by the driver it will betemporarily deactivated until you resumecontrol. The system alerts you with awarning chime and a message in the display.A sensor is mounted behind the interiorrear view mirror. It continuously monitorsconditions to alert you of unintentionallane drifting at high speeds.The system will automatically detect andtrack the lane markings on the road. If itdetects that the vehicle is unintentionallydrifting towards the lane boundaries thena visual warning will be displayed in theinformation display. The system will alsoautomatically apply a steering torque tocorrect the vehicle path. If the system isunable to correct the vehicle path a lanedeparture warning will be given. See Usinglane departure warning (page 156).

USING THE LANE KEEPING AIDSwitching the system on and offNote: The system is per default off.Note: When the system has been switchedon, lane departure warning is per default on.

158

Lane Keeping Aid

Page 161: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E132099

Activate and deactivate the system usingthe button on the indicator stalk.Press the button three times to switch thesystem on. Press the button again to turnthe system off.

System warnings

E132651

A column of lane markings is displayedeither side of the vehicle graphic.The lane markings are colour coded asfollows:• Green - The system is ready to

intervene if an unintentional lanedeparture may occur.

• Yellow - The system will automaticallyapply a steering torque to align thevehicle path and correct anyunintended lane drift.

• Red - The vehicle is approaching or istoo close to the detected laneboundary. A warning is given in theform of a vibration felt through thesteering wheel. Take immediate safeaction to reposition the vehicle.

• Grey - The relevant lane boundary willbe suppressed.

Instances where a lane boundary may besuppressed:• Lane markings on the road may not be

detected by the sensor.• The direction indicator for that side of

the vehicle is on.• During hard acceleration and braking,

or if direct steering is applied.• Vehicle speed is outside the operating

limits• If there is an ABS or Stability Control

(ESP) intervention.• Narrow lane width.Note: The system can be overridden at anytime during its operation by turning thesteering wheel.

159

Lane Keeping Aid

Page 162: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if

required.If the sensor becomes blocked thesystem may not function.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weather conditionsthe system may not function. Rain,snow, spray and large contrasts in

lighting can all influence the sensor.Do not carry out windscreen repairs inthe immediate area surrounding thesensor.If your vehicle is fitted with asuspension kit not approved by us, thesystem may not function correctly.Always fit Ford Original Parts whenreplacing headlamp bulbs. Otherbulbs may reduce system

performance.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings, insectsand snow or ice.Note: The system may not detect all trafficsigns.Note: The system is designed to read signsmeeting the Vienna convention.A sensor is mounted behind the interiorrear view mirror. It continuously monitorsroad signs to alert you of the current legalspeed limit and overtaking regulations.

The system will automatically detectrecognizable traffic signs, for examplespeed limit signs, no overtaking signs andspeed limit cancellation signs.

USING TRAFFIC SIGNRECOGNITIONSwitching the system on and offNote: The system status and settings willremain unchanged during ignition cycles.The system can be switched on and offusing the information display. See GeneralInformation (page 75).

Setting the system speed warningThe system has a number of speedwarning levels which can be set using theinformation display. See GeneralInformation (page 75).

System display

E132994

The system can display two traffic signsin parallel.You can view the status at any time usingthe information display.The system display is in four stages asfollows:1. All new recognisable traffic signs will

appear brighter than the other warningsigns in the display.

2. After a predetermined time they willbe shown normally.

160

Traffic Sign Recognition

Page 163: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

3. After a predetermined distance theywill be shown greyed out.

4. After another predetermined distancethey will be deleted.

If a supplementary traffic sign is detected,for example a reduced speed limit in wetroad conditions sign, it will not be shownbut will appear as an empty boxunderneath the respective sign.

161

Traffic Sign Recognition

Page 164: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if

required.Never look directly into the sensorwith any type of object, there is a riskof eye injury.If the sensor becomes blocked thesystem may not function.To achieve full system performance,the brake system needs to bebedded in. See Running-In (page

176).The system performance may varydepending on the vehicle and roadconditions.The system will not react to vehiclesdriving in a different direction.The system will not react to bicycles,motorcycles, people or animals.When the ignition is on the sensorwill constantly transmit a laserbeam.The system will not operate duringharsh acceleration.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weather conditionsthe system may not function. Rain,snow, spray and ice can all influence

the sensor.Do not carry out windscreen repairs inthe immediate area surrounding thesensor.

CAUTIONSIf your vehicle is fitted with awindscreen not approved by us, thesystem may not function correctly.If the engine stops after the systemhas been activated, the hazardwarning flashers will be activated.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings, insectsand snow or ice.Note: Keep the bonnet free of ice and snow,otherwise the system may not functioncorrectly.A sensor is mounted behind the interiorrear view mirror. It continuously monitorsconditions to decide when to intervene.The system is designed to help you reducelow speed collisions into the rear ofanother vehicle. It will also help you reducethe impact damage or potentially avoidthe collision completely.The system operates at speeds belowapproximately 30 km/h (19 mph) byapplying the brakes when the sensordetects that a collision is likely.You must depress the brake pedal toobtain full braking force.When the system is braking or hasautomatically applied the brakes, amessage will be shown in the display.For laser sensor information and data: SeeType approvals (page 287).

USING ACTIVE CITY STOP

WARNINGNever look directly into the sensorwith any type of object, there is a riskof eye injury.

162

Active City Stop

Page 165: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Switching the system on and offNote: The system is per default on.Note: In certain situations, it may beadvisable to disable the system, for exampledriving off road when objects may cover thewindscreen.Activate and deactivate the system usingthe information display. See GeneralInformation (page 75).

163

Active City Stop

Page 166: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGSUse load securing straps to anapproved standard, e.g. DIN.Make sure that you secure all looseitems properly.Place luggage and other loads as lowand as far forward as possible withinthe luggage or loadspace.Do not drive with the tailgate or reardoor open. Exhaust fumes may enterthe vehicle.Do not exceed the maximum frontand rear axle loads for your vehicle.See Vehicle identification (page

221).Heavy loads, when placed in thepassenger compartment, should beon folded rear seats as shown. See

Rear Seats (page 109).

CAUTIONSDo not allow items to contact the rearwindows.Do not use any abrasive materials toclean the interior of the rear windows.Do not install stickers or labels to theinterior of the rear windows.

E97377

LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS

E132901

Lift the flap to access the anchor point.

LUGGAGE COVERS

WARNINGDo not place objects on the luggagecover.

164

Load Carrying

Page 167: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E72969

Pull out the cover and secure it in theretaining points.Release it from the retaining points and letit roll back into the case. Clip the retaininghook onto the case.

E72970

To remove or install the cover, push eitherend of the case inwards.

CARGO NETSLuggage retention net

WARNINGOn Estate vehicles, luggage retentionnet anchor points are not fittedbehind the first row seats, but are

fitted behind the second row seats.

To install the cargo retention net cassette:Remove the luggage cover.Push the sliders on the cassette towardseach other and insert the telescopic barinto the holes on the sidewall behind therear seatbacks.Ensure that the end caps with theanti-rotation pin are correctly fitted in theside trim.

E78834

Pull up the net and insert the ends of thebar into the retainers on the roof.Ensure that the bar is pushed forwards intothe narrow section of the retainers.

WARNINGAfter installing the cassette, pressthe front edge of the luggage coverback down into its original position

(forwards) to prevent vision out of the rearscreen being obscured.

165

Load Carrying

Page 168: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Reinstall the luggage cover.Remove in the reverse order.

Cargo net

E78835

A B

With retaining ringsAWithout retaining ringsB

The cargo net can be used to preventobjects sliding around.Attach the hooks at each corner of the netto the four retaining points on the loadfloor.

DOG GUARD

CAUTIONKeep a distance of at least onecentimetre between the dog guardand the seats in front of it.

Installing behind the front seats

E86848

1. Push the ends of the bar on the grilletowards each other and insert theminto the retainers on the roof. Push thebar forwards into the narrow sectionof the retainers.

E87782

2. Attach the dog guard to the loweranchor points. Do not tighten thescrews.

166

Load Carrying

Page 169: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E87783

3. Attach the grille to the lower bar withthe handwheels. Do not tighten thehandwheels.

4. Tighten the screws at the lower anchorpoints.

5. Tighten the handwheels.

Installing behind the rear seats

E86848

1. Push the ends of the bar on the grilletowards each other and insert theminto the retainers on the roof. Push thebar forwards into the narrow sectionof the retainers.

E104424

2. Remove two screws from both theluggage anchor points. See LuggageAnchor Points (page 164).

3. Attach the lower bar to the grille withthe handwheels. Do not tighten thehandwheels.

4. Attach the dog guard lower bar to theluggage anchor points, secure with thenew supplied screws.

5. Tighten the handwheels.Remove in the reverse order.

167

Load Carrying

Page 170: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

ROOF RACKS AND LOADCARRIERSRoof rack

WARNINGSIf you use a roof rack, the fuelconsumption of your vehicle will behigher and you may experience

different driving characteristics.Read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when you are fitting aroof rack.Do not exceed the maximumpermissible roof load of 75kilogrammes (165 pounds)

(including the roof rack).

Check the security of the roof rack andtighten its fittings as follows:• Before starting.• After driving 50 kilometres (30 miles).• At 1000 kilometres (600 miles)

intervals.To reduce fuel consumption, cross railsshould be removed when not in use.

Installing the crossbarsWARNINGS

Distribute the load evenly over theloading area and keep the centre ofgravity as low as possible. Secure the

load well to prevent it from slipping. Neverplace any loads directly onto the roofsurface.

Remove the crossbars beforeentering an automatic car wash.

Note: The side mounting tracks aredesigned such that crossbars (for bicyclecarriers, ski carriers etc.) from the Fordaccessories range can be fitted.

Note: Before installing the crossbars, cleanthe side mounting tracks with water and asponge.Note: Position the crossbars as shown.

A B

E135136

515 mm (20 inches)A750 mm (30 inches)B

E135137

Note: Adhesive pads are supplied to helpreduce the buffeting noise.Note: Make sure the surface of thecrossbars is clean before attaching theadhesive pads.1. Remove the backing and attach the

adhesive pads to the crossbars in thepositions shown.

168

Load Carrying

Page 171: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

3E135138

4

2

2. Insert the key. Turn the keyanti-clockwise.

3. Remove the cover.4. Loosen the screws.

E135140

A B

5. Install rubber strips in the positionsshown.

E135139

4Nm

4 Nm

7

A

Note: Make sure there is no gap betweencrossbar and rail(A).6. Install the crossbars.7. Tighten the screws until you hear a

distinct click.8. Install the cover. Turn the key clockwise

to lock.9. Remove the key.

Installing a roof box

E135141

Make sure the adhesive pads are not incontact with the installation bolt.

169

Load Carrying

Page 172: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNINGSDo not exceed 100 km/h (62 mph).

The rear tyre pressures must beincreased by 0.2 bar (3 psi) abovespecification. See Technical

Specifications (page 218).Do not exceed the maximum grosstrain weight stated on the vehicleidentification plate. See Vehicle

identification (page 221).

CAUTIONDo not exceed the maximumpermissible nose weight, i.e. verticalweight on the tow ball, of 75

kilogrammes (165 pounds).

Note: Not all vehicles are suitable orapproved to have tow bars fitted. Checkwith your dealer first.Place loads as low and central to theaxle(s) of the trailer as possible. If you aretowing with an unladen vehicle, the loadin the trailer should be placed toward thenose, within the maximum nose load, asthis gives the best stability.The stability of the vehicle to trailercombination is very much dependant onthe quality of the trailer.In high altitude regions above 1000 metres(3281 feet), the stipulated maximumpermitted gross train weight must bereduced by 10% for every additional 1000metres (3281 feet).

Steep gradientsWARNING

The overrun brake on a trailer is notcontrolled by ABS.

Change down a gear before you reach asteep downhill gradient.

RETRACTABLE TOW BALL

WARNINGYou will hear a warning tone whenthe tow ball arm is not in one of thelocked positions. The warning tone

will switch off after 30 seconds. If you donot hear the tone when moving the towball arm or at system activation, do notuse the tow bar and have it checked by aproperly trained technician.

CAUTIONOnly move the tow ball arm with yourhand. Never use your foot or auxiliarytools as damage to the mechanism

may result.

E139283

A

B

A 13-pin trailer socket A is providedunderneath the rear bumper next to thetow ball arm B.

Releasing the tow ball armCAUTION

Do not touch the tow ball arm duringthe release process.

170

Towing

Page 173: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: If the release process is interrupted,for example an obstacle in the way or lossof power supply, the system will need to bereset. To reset the system, repeat therelease process.Note: The lamp in the switch illuminateswhen the system is activated.The following conditions must be metbefore releasing the tow ball arm:• The luggage compartment lid must be

open.• The ignition must be switched off.• No plug must be attached to the 13-pin

trailer socket.• The battery voltage must be greater

than 11 volts.

E132909

1. Press the button to activate thesystem.

2. Press the button again within fourseconds to release the tow ball arm.

E139284

The tow ball arm automatically swivelsinto the lowered position.If the tow ball arm fails to release, pressthe button again for 15 seconds.

WARNINGIf it still fails to release, do not usethe tow bar and have it checked bya properly trained technician.

Swivelling the tow ball arm out

E75179

Move the tow ball arm to the operatingposition. The tow ball arm automaticallylocks in the operating position. The lockingprocess is clearly audible and the warningtone will stop.

171

Towing

Page 174: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Swivelling the tow ball arm inCAUTION

Before swivelling the tow ball arm in,always unhitch the trailer or dismantleload carriers and their attachments.

Dismantle attachments for trackingstabilisation. Remove the plug for thetrailer power supply and the adapter fromthe socket. Failure to do so may result indamage to the bumper.

1. Release the tow ball arm. See releasingthe tow ball arm.

E139284

2. The tow ball arm automatically swivelsinto the lowered position.

E75177

3. Move the tow ball arm to the stop inthe stowed position. The tow ball armautomatically locks in the stowedposition. The locking process is clearlyaudible and the warning tone will stop.

Fault conditionsIf the tow ball arm release button isilluminated or you hear a warning tonewhen the ignition switch is in position II,repeat the release process.If you pull on the tow ball arm during therelease process, the system will stopmoving to prevent an overload condition.To reset the system, press the releasebutton for 15 seconds.

Driving with a trailerWARNINGS

In the event of a vehicle breakdown,disconnect the trailer before towingthe vehicle.If any of the conditions below cannotbe met, do not use the tow bar andhave it checked by a properly trained

technician.

Before starting your journey, make surethat the tow ball arm is properly locked.Check that:• there is no warning tone when the

locking procedure has been completed• the tow ball arm is locked. It must not

move when jerked.

MaintenanceCAUTIONS

The towing hitch and control unit aremaintenance-free. Do not grease oroil them.Only the manufacturer should carryout repairs or dismantle the towinghitch.If you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, do not direct thespray onto the swivel joint of the tow

ball arm.

172

Towing

Page 175: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

TOW BALL

WARNINGSWhen not in use, always transportthe tow ball arm securely fastenedin the luggage compartment.Take special care when fitting thetow ball arm as the safety of thevehicle and the trailer depends on

this.Do not use any tools for mounting ordismounting the tow ball arm. Do notmodify the trailer coupling. Do not

disassemble or repair the tow ball arm.

E71328

A 13-pin trailer socket and the tow ball armseat are provided underneath the rearbumper. Turn the trailer socket downthrough 90 degrees until it engages in theend position.

Unlocking the tow ball armmechanism

E713292

1

3

1. Remove the protecting cap (1). Insertthe key and turn it clockwise to unlock(2).

2. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull thehandwheel out and turn it clockwiseuntil it clicks (3).

3. The red mark on the handwheel mustalign with the green mark on the towball.

4. Release the handwheel. The tow ballarm is unlocked.

173

Towing

Page 176: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Inserting the tow ball arm

1

2E71330

WARNINGThe tow ball arm may only beinserted when completely unlocked.

1. Pull out the plug.2. Insert the tow ball arm vertically and

press it upwards until it engages (1).Do not hold your hand near thehandwheel.

3. The green mark on the handwheelmust align with the green mark on thetow ball.

4. To lock, turn the key anti-clockwise andremove the key (2).

5. Pull the protecting cap from the keybow and press it onto the lock.

Driving with a trailer

E71331

A

B

WARNINGIf any of the below conditions cannotbe met, do not use the tow bar andhave it checked by a properly trained

technician.

Before starting your journey, make surethat the tow ball arm is properly locked.Check that:• the green marks are aligned• the handwheel (A) is correctly fitted

to the tow ball arm• you have removed the key (B)• the tow ball arm is securely positioned.

It must not move when jerked.

174

Towing

Page 177: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Removing the tow ball arm

3

1E71332

2

1. Unhitch the trailer.2. Remove the protecting cap. Press the

cap into the key bow. Insert the key andunlock (1).

3. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull thehandwheel out, turn it clockwiseagainst the stop (2) and remove thetow ball arm (3).

4. Release the handwheel.When unlocked in this way, the tow ballarm can be reinserted at any time.

Driving without a trailer

E94771

1

1. Remove the tow ball arm.2. Insert the plug into its seat (1).

WARNINGNever unlock the tow ball arm withthe trailer attached.

MaintenanceWARNING

Remove the tow ball arm andprotect the seat with the plug beforesteam cleaning your vehicle.

Keep the system clean. Periodicallylubricate bearings, sliding surfaces, andlocking balls with resin-free grease or oiland the lock with graphite.In case of loss, replacement keys areavailable from the manufacturer by statingthe number on the lock cylinder.

175

Towing

Page 178: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

RUNNING-INTyres

WARNINGNew tyres need to be run-in forapproximately 500 kilometres (300miles). During this time, you may

experience different driving characteristics.

Brakes and clutchWARNING

Avoid heavy use of the brakes andclutch if possible for the first 150kilometres (100 miles) in town and

for the first 1500 kilometres (1000 miles)on motorways.

EngineCAUTION

Avoid driving too fast during the first1500 kilometres (1000 miles). Varyyour speed frequently and change up

through the gears early. Do not labour theengine.

COLD WEATHERPRECAUTIONSThe functional operation of somecomponents and systems can be affectedat temperatures below -30°C (-22°F).

DRIVING THROUGH WATERDriving through water

CAUTIONSDrive through water in an emergencyonly, and not as part of normal driving.Engine damage can occur if waterenters the air filter.

In an emergency, the vehicle can be driventhrough water to a maximum depth of 200millimetres (8 inches) and at a maximumspeed of 10 km/h (6 mph). Extra cautionshould be exercised when driving throughflowing water.When driving in water, maintain a lowspeed and do not stop the vehicle. Afterdriving through water, and as soon as it issafe to do so:• Depress the brake pedal lightly and

check that full brake function isachieved.

• Check that the horn works.• Check that the vehicle's lights are fully

operational.• Check the power assistance

of the steering system.

176

Driving Hints

Page 179: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

FIRST AID KITSpace is provided in the luggagecompartment.

WARNING TRIANGLESpace is provided in the luggagecompartment.

177

Roadside Emergencies

Page 180: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

FUSE BOX LOCATIONSEngine compartment fuse boxThis fuse box is located in the enginecompartment See Maintenance (page190).

Passenger compartment fuse box

E130170

E130171

1. Pinch the retaining clips to release thecover.

2. Lower the fuse box cover and pull ittowards you.

Install in the reverse order.

Load compartment fuse box4-door

E135336

5-door

E135337

178

Fuses

Page 181: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Estate

E135338

CHANGING A FUSE

WARNINGSDo not modify the electrical systemof your vehicle in any way. Haverepairs to the electrical system and

the replacement of relays and high currentfuses carried out by a properly trainedtechnician.

Switch the ignition and all electricalequipment off before touching orattempting to change a fuse.

CAUTIONFit a replacement fuse with the samerating as the one you have removed.

Note: You can identify a blown fuse by abreak in the filament.Note: All fuses, except high current fuses,are a push fit.Note: A fuse puller is located in the enginecompartment fuse box.

179

Fuses

Page 182: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHARTEngine compartment fuse box

E129925

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

ABS pump, Electronic Stability Program (ESP) pump407

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) valve308

Heated rear window309

Heater blower4010

Start-stop module3011

Engine management systems3012

Starter relay3013

Heated windscreen (right-hand side)4014

Transmission control module2515

180

Fuses

Page 183: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Heated windscreen (left-hand side)4016

Auxiliary heater2017

Windscreen wipers2018

ABS, Electronic Stability Program (ESP) module519

Horn1520

Brake lamp switch521

Battery monitoring system1522

Relay coils, lighting control switch module523

Rear power outlet2024

Electric exterior mirrors1025

Transmission control module1526

Air conditioning clutch1527

Adaptive cruise control528

Headlamp washer2029

Powertrain control module (PCM)530

Not used-31

EGR Valve, swirl control valves, HEGO sensor (enginemanagement)1032

Engine control valves1033

Injectors1034

Active grille shutter (Petrol engine)535

Active grille shutter and filter heater (Diesel engine)1535

Powertrain control module (PCM)1036

Not used-37

Powertrain control module (PCM), transmission controlmodule1538

Headlamp control module539

181

Fuses

Page 184: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Electric power assisted steering540

Body Control Module2041

Rear window wiper1542

Headlamp levelling1543

Adaptive cruise control544

Heated washer jets1045

Electric windows (front)2546

Heated exterior mirrors7.547

Vaporizer1548

182

Fuses

Page 185: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Passenger compartment fuse box

E129926

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Fuel pump supply2056

183

Fuses

Page 186: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Not used-57

Not used-58

Passive anti theft system (PATS) supply559

Interior lamps, driver's door switch pack, glove box,ambient lighting, electric sunroof1060

Cigar lighter, rear power outlet2061

Rain sensor module, humidity sensor, auto-dimming mirror562

Adaptive cruise control1063

Not used-64

Luggage compartment lid release1065

Driver's door lock, double locking2066

Information and entertainment display, GPS, BVC7.567

Steering column lock1568

Instrument cluster569

Central locking2070

Air conditioning1071

Steering wheel control module7.572

Battery back-up sounder (alarm system), onboarddiagnostics system573

Main beam1574

Front fog lamps1575

Reversing lamp1076

Washer pump2077

Ignition switch or start button578

Radio, hazard and door lock buttons1579

Electric sunroof2080

Interior motion sensor, RF receiver581

184

Fuses

Page 187: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Washer pump ground2082

Central locking ground2083

Driver's door lock and double locking ground2084

Climate control heater, passenger airbag deactivationswitch, heated seats switch, auxiliary heater, manual airconditioning heater module

7.585

Restraint system, passenger airbag deactivation system1086

Not used-87

Not used-88

Not used-89

Load compartment fuse box

E129927

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Not used-1

Keyless vehicle module102

Keyless vehicle door handles53

Door module (left-hand front) (electric windows, centrallocking, electric folding mirrors, heated exterior mirrors)254

185

Fuses

Page 188: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Door module (right-hand front) (electric windows, centrallocking, electric folding mirrors, heated exterior mirrors)255

Door module (left-hand rear) (electric windows)256

Door module (right-hand rear) (electric windows)257

Alarm system108

Electric driver's seat259

Not used-10

Not used-11

Air conditioning module (with start-stop module)1012

Instrument cluster (with start-stop module)513

Information and entertainment display, GPS module (withstart-stop module)7.514

Audio unit, audio unit control panel (with start-stopmodule)1515

Not used-16

Not used-17

Not used-18

Not used-19

Not used-20

Not used-21

Not used-22

Not used-23

Not used-24

Not used-25

Trailer module4026

Not used-27

Not used-28

186

Fuses

Page 189: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Blind spot monitor, lane keeping aid, active city stop, rearview camera (without start-stop module)529

Parking aid module530

Not used-31

Not used-32

Not used-33

Heated driver's seat1534

Heated front passenger seat1535

Not used-36

Electric sunroof537

Not used-38

Not used-39

Not used-40

Retractable tow ball541

Not used-42

Not used-43

Not used-44

Not used-45

Blind spot monitor, lane keeping aid, rear view camera(with start-stop module)1046

187

Fuses

Page 190: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

TOWING POINTSTowing eye locationThe screw-in towing eye is located in thespare wheel well.The towing eye must always be carried inthe vehicle.

Installing the towing eyeCAUTION

The screw-in towing eye has aleft-hand thread. Turn itanti-clockwise to install it. Make sure

that the towing eye is fully tightened.

Note: On vehicles with a tow bar, thetowing eye cannot be installed at the rearof the vehicle. Use the tow bar to tow avehicle.

Front towing eye

E78367

Rear towing eye

E78368

Insert a suitable object into the hole on theunderside of the cover and prise off thecover.Install the towing eye.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ONFOUR WHEELSAll vehicles

WARNINGSSwitch the ignition on when yourvehicle is being towed. The steeringlock will engage and the direction

indicators and brake lamps will not workif you do not.

The brake and steering assistancewill not operate unless the engine isrunning. Press the brake pedal harder

and allow for increased stopping distancesand heavier steering.

188

Vehicle recovery

Page 191: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

CAUTIONSToo much tension in the tow ropecould cause damage to your vehicleor the vehicle that is towing.Select neutral when your vehicle isbeing towed.In the event of a breakdown ormechanical failure do not useindividual axle carriers. Your vehicle

must be recovered with either ALL wheelson the ground or transported with ALLwheels lifted clear of the ground on a levelplatform.

Drive off slowly and smoothly withoutjerking the vehicle that is towing.

Vehicles with automatictransmission

CAUTIONSIf a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph) and adistance of 20 kilometres (12 miles)is to be exceeded ALL wheels must

be lifted clear of the ground.It is recommended not to tow with thedrive wheels on the ground. However,if it is required to move the vehicle

from a dangerous location, do not tow yourvehicle faster than 20 km/h (12 mph) orfurther than 20 kilometres (12 miles).

Do not tow your vehicle backwards.

In the event of a mechanical failure ofthe transmission do not use individualaxle carriers. ALL wheels must be

lifted clear of the ground on a levelplatform.

Do not tow your vehicle if the ambienttemperature is below 0°C (32°F).

189

Vehicle recovery

Page 192: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

GENERAL INFORMATIONHave your vehicle serviced regularly to helpmaintain its roadworthiness and resalevalue. There is a large network of FordAuthorised Repairers that are there to helpyou with their professional servicingexpertise. We believe that their speciallytrained technicians are best qualified toservice your vehicle properly and expertly.They are supported by a wide range ofhighly specialised tools developedspecifically for servicing your vehicle.In addition to regular servicing, werecommend that you carry out thefollowing additional checks.

WARNINGSSwitch the ignition off beforetouching or attempting adjustmentof any kind.Do not touch the electronic ignitionsystem parts after you have switchedthe ignition on or when the engine is

running. The system operates at highvoltage.

Keep your hands and clothing clearof the engine cooling fan. Undercertain conditions, the fan may

continue to run for several minutes afteryou have switched the engine off.

CAUTIONWhen carrying out maintenancechecks, make sure that filler caps arefitted securely.

Daily checks• Exterior lamps.• Interior lamps.• Warning lamps and indicators.

Check when refuelling• Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check

(page 198).• Brake fluid level. See Brake and

Clutch Fluid Check (page 200).• Washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid

Check (page 200).• Tyre pressures (when cold). See

Technical Specifications (page 218).• Tyre condition. See Wheels and Tyres

(page 208).

Monthly checks• Engine coolant level (engine cold). See

Engine Coolant Check (page 199).• Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.• Air conditioning operation.• Parking brake operation.• Horn operation.• Tightness of wheel nuts. See

Technical Specifications (page 218).

OPENING AND CLOSING THEBONNETOpening the bonnet

E73698

190

Maintenance

Page 193: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E133239

Move the yellow catch to the right.E87786

Open the bonnet and support it with thestrut.

Closing the bonnetWARNING

Make sure that the bonnet is closedproperly.

Lower the bonnet and allow it to drop fromunder its own weight for the last 20 – 30centimetres (8 - 11 inches).

191

Maintenance

Page 194: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 1.6L DURATEC-16V TI-VCT (SIGMA)

E130030

A B C D E F

GHI

Engine coolant reservoir*: See Engine Coolant Check (page 199).ABrake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive)*: See Brake and ClutchFluid Check (page 200).

B

Engine oil filler cap*: See Engine Oil Check (page 198).CBrake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive)*: See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 200).

D

Battery: See Vehicle battery (page 206).EEngine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 178).FAir cleaner: No maintenance necessary.GEngine oil dipstick*: See Engine Oil Check (page 198).HScreen washer fluid reservoir*: See Washer Fluid Check (page 200).I

*For easy identification, filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are marked in colour.

192

Maintenance

Page 195: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 1.6L ECOBOOST SCTI (SIGMA)

E132729

A

I H FG

B C D E

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 200).

A

Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine Oil Check (page 198).BBrake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 200).

C

Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 206).DEngine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 178).EAir cleaner. No maintenance necessary.FEngine oil dipstick1. See Engine Oil Check (page 198).G

193

Maintenance

Page 196: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Screen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 200).HEngine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 199).I

1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.

UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 1.6L DURATORQ-TDCI (DV) DIESEL

E130031

A B C D E F

GHI

Engine coolant reservoir*: See Engine Coolant Check (page 199).ABrake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive)*: See Brake and ClutchFluid Check (page 200).

B

Engine oil filler cap*: See Engine Oil Check (page 198).CBrake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive)*: See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 200).

D

Battery: See Vehicle battery (page 206).E

194

Maintenance

Page 197: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Engine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 178).FAir cleaner: No maintenance necessary.GEngine oil dipstick*: See Engine Oil Check (page 198).HScreen washer fluid reservoir*: See Washer Fluid Check (page 200).I

*For easy identification, filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are marked in colour.

UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATEC-HE (MI4)

E139960

A B D EC

FGHI

195

Maintenance

Page 198: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Engine coolant reservoir*: See Engine Coolant Check (page 199).ABrake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive)*: See Brake and ClutchFluid Check (page 200).

B

Engine oil filler cap*: See Engine Oil Check (page 198).CBrake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive)*: See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 200).

D

Battery: See Vehicle battery (page 206).EEngine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 178).FAir cleaner: No maintenance necessary.GEngine oil dipstick*: See Engine Oil Check (page 198).HScreen washer fluid reservoir*: See Washer Fluid Check (page 200).I

*For easy identification, filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are marked in colour.

196

Maintenance

Page 199: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL

E130032

A B C D E F

GHI

Engine coolant reservoir*: See Engine Coolant Check (page 199).ABrake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive)*: See Brake and ClutchFluid Check (page 200).

B

Engine oil dipstick*: See Engine Oil Check (page 198).CBrake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive)*: See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 200).

D

Battery: See Vehicle battery (page 206).EEngine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 178).FAir cleaner: No maintenance necessary.GEngine oil filler cap*: See Engine Oil Check (page 198).HScreen washer fluid reservoir*: See Washer Fluid Check (page 200).I

*For easy identification, filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are marked in colour.

197

Maintenance

Page 200: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6LDURATEC-16V TI-VCT (SIGMA)

E95540

BA

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6LECOBOOST SCTI (SIGMA)

A B

E134114

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0LDURATEC-HE (MI4)

E134040

A B

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6LDURATORQ-TDCI (DV)DIESEL/2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI(DW) DIESEL

E95543

BA

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL CHECK

CAUTIONDo not use oil additives or otherengine treatments. Under certainconditions, they could damage the

engine.

198

Maintenance

Page 201: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: The oil consumption of new enginesreaches its normal level after approximately5000 kilometres (3000 miles).

Checking the oil levelCAUTION

Make sure that the level is betweenthe MIN and the MAX marks.

Note: Check the level before starting theengine.Note: Make sure that your vehicle is on levelground.Note: Oil expands when it is hot. The levelmay therefore extend a few millimetresbeyond the MAX mark.Remove the dipstick and wipe it with aclean, lint free cloth. Replace the dipstickand remove it again to check the oil level.If the level is at the MIN mark, top upimmediately.

Topping upWARNINGS

Only top up when the engine is cold.If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutesfor the engine to cool down.Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.

Remove the filler cap.CAUTION

Do not top up further than the MAXmark.

Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 201).Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feela strong resistance.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECKChecking the coolant level

WARNINGDo not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your doctor.

CAUTIONMake sure that the level is betweenthe MIN and the MAX marks.

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. Thelevel may therefore extend beyond the MAXmark.If the level is at the MIN mark, top upimmediately.

Topping upWARNINGS

Only top up when the engine is cold.If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutesfor the engine to cool down.Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is hot. Wait for the engineto cool down.Undiluted coolant is flammable andmay ignite if spilt on a hot exhaust.

CAUTIONSIn an emergency, you can add justwater to the cooling system to reacha vehicle service station. Have the

system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

199

Maintenance

Page 202: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

CAUTIONSProlonged use of incorrect dilution ofthe coolant can cause engine damagefrom corrosion, overheating or

freezing.

Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure willescape slowly as you unscrew the cap.

CAUTIONDo not top up further than the MAXmark.

Top up with a 50/50 mixture of coolantand water using fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 201).

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUIDCHECK

WARNINGSUse of any fluid other than therecommended brake fluid mayreduce brake efficiency and not meet

Ford's performance standards.Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your doctor.

WARNINGSIf the level is at the MIN mark, havethe system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as

possible.

Note: Keep brake fluid clean and dry.Contamination with dirt, water, petroleumproducts or other materials may result inbrake system damage and possible failure.Note: The brake and the clutch systems aresupplied from the same reservoir.Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 201).

WASHER FLUID CHECKNote: The front and rear washer systemsare supplied from the same reservoir.When topping up, use a mixture of washerfluid and water to help prevent freezing incold weather and improve the cleaningcapability. We recommend that you useonly high quality washer fluid.For information on fluid dilution, refer tothe product instructions.

200

Maintenance

Page 203: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSVehicle fluids

CAUTIONDo not use fluids which do not meet the specifications or requirements defined. Useof unsuitable fluids may lead to damage which is not covered by your Warranty.

Recommended fluidSpecificationItem

Castrol or Ford Engine OilWSS-M2C913-CEngine oil - petrol and dieselengines

Castrol Engine OilWSS-M2C925-BAlternative engine oil -petrol engines only

Motorcraft SuperPlus Anti-freezeWSS-M97B44-DAntifreeze

Motorcraft or Ford DOT 4 LVHigh Performance BrakeFluid

WSS-M6C65-A2 or ISO4925 Class 6Brake fluid

Your engine has been designed to be used with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which givesa fuel economy benefit whilst maintaining the durability of your engine.For petrol engines only, Ford and Castrol have developed a low friction SAE-5W-20 oilwhich offers further fuel economy benefits over the standard SAE-5W-30 oil. If this oilis not available, we recommend that you service with oil to specification WSS-M2C913-C.Topping up the oil: If you are unable to find an oil that meets the specification definedby WSS-M2C913-C or WSS-M2C925-B (petrol engines only), you must use SAE 5W-30that meets the specification defined by ACEA A5/B5.Using topping up oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine crankingperiods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emissionlevels.Castrol engine oil recommended.

E115472

201

Maintenance

Page 204: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Capacities

Capacity in Litres (gallons)ItemVariant

55 (12.1)Fuel tankVehicles with a petrolengine

53 (11.7)Fuel tank1.6L Duratorq-TDCi - DV

60 (13.2)Fuel tank2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW

4.5 (1)Windscreen washer system- with headlamp washersAll

3 (0.7)Windscreen washer system- without headlampwashers

All

4.1 (0.9)Engine oil - with filter1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT -Sigma

3.75 (0.8)Engine oil - without filter1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT -Sigma

approx. 5.8 (1.3)Cooling system1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT -Sigma

4.1 (0.9)Engine oil - with filter1.6L EcoBoost - Sigma

3.75 (0.8)Engine oil - without filter1.6L EcoBoost - Sigma

approx. 6.3 (1.4)Cooling system1.6L EcoBoost - Sigma

4.3 (1)Engine oil - with filter2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4

3.9 (0.9)Engine oil - without filter2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4

approx. 6.5 (1.4)Cooling system2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4

3.8 (0.8)Engine oil - with filter1.6L Duratorq-TDCi - DV

3.5 (0.8)Engine oil - without filter1.6L Duratorq-TDCi - DV

approx. 7.3 (1.6)Cooling system1.6L Duratorq-TDCi - DV

5.7 (1.3)Engine oil - with filter2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW

5.4 (1.2)Engine oil - without filter2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW

approx. 8.5 (1.9)Cooling system2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW

202

Maintenance

Page 205: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Engine oil top up capacities

Capacity in litres (gallons)Engine

0.8 (0.2)1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT - Sigma

0.8 (0.2)1.6L EcoBoost - Sigma

0.9 (0.2)2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4

1.6 (0.4)1.6L Duratorq-TDCi - DV

1.8 (0.4)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW

203

Maintenance

Page 206: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR

WARNINGIf you use a car wash with a waxingcycle, make sure that you remove thewax from the windscreen.

CAUTIONSPrior to using a car wash facility checkthe suitability of it for your vehicle.Some car wash installations usewater at high pressure. This coulddamage certain parts of your vehicle.Remove the aerial before using anautomatic car wash.Switch the heater blower off toprevent contamination of the fresh airfilter.

We recommend that you wash your vehiclewith a sponge and lukewarm watercontaining a car shampoo.

Cleaning the headlampsCAUTIONS

Do not scrape the headlamp lensesor use abrasives, alcoholic solvents orchemical solvents to clean them.Do not wipe the headlamps whenthey are dry.

Cleaning the rear windowCAUTION

Do not scrape the inside of the rearwindow or use abrasives or chemicalsolvents to clean it.

Use a clean, lint free cloth or a dampchamois leather to clean the inside of therear window.

Cleaning the chrome trimCAUTION

Do not use abrasives or chemicalsolvents. Use soapy water.

Body paintwork preservationCAUTIONS

Do not polish your vehicle in strongsunshine.Do not allow polish to touch plasticsurfaces. It could be difficult toremove.Do not apply polish to the windscreenor rear window. This could cause thewipers to become noisy and they may

not clear the window properly.

We recommend that you wax thepaintwork once or twice a year.

CLEANING THE INTERIORSeat belts

WARNINGSDo not use abrasives, or chemicalsolvents to clean them.Do not allow moisture to penetratethe seat belt retractor mechanism.

Clean the seat belts with interior cleaneror water applied with a soft sponge. Letthe seat belts dry naturally, away fromartificial heat.

204

Vehicle Care

Page 207: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Instrument cluster screens, LCDscreens, radio screens

WARNINGDo not use abrasives, alcoholicsolvents or chemical solvents toclean them.

Rear windowsCAUTIONS

Do not use any abrasive materials toclean the interior of the rear windows.Do not install stickers or labels to theinterior of the rear windows.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINTDAMAGE

CAUTIONRemove apparently harmless lookingsubstances from the paintworkimmediately (e.g. bird droppings, tree

resins, insect remains, tar spots, road saltand industrial fall out).

You should repair paintwork damagecaused by stones from the road or minorscratches as soon as possible. A choice ofproducts is available from your FordDealer. Read and follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

205

Vehicle Care

Page 208: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGDo not use fuel lines, engine rockercovers or the intake manifold asgrounding points.

CAUTIONSConnect batteries with only the samenominal voltage.Always use booster cables withinsulated clamps and adequate sizecable.Do not disconnect the battery fromthe vehicle’s electrical system.

To connect the booster cables

A

B

C D

E102925

Flat battery vehicleABooster battery vehicleBPositive connection cableCNegative connection cableD

1. Position the vehicles so that they donot touch one another.

2. Switch off the engine and any electricalequipment.

3. Connect the positive (+) terminal ofvehicle B with the positive (+) terminalof vehicle A (cable C).

4. Connect the negative (-) terminal ofvehicle B to the ground connection ofvehicle A (cable D). See Batteryconnection points (page 207).

206

Vehicle battery

Page 209: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

CAUTIONSDo not connect to the negative (–)terminal of the flat battery.Make sure that the cables are clear ofany moving parts and fuel deliverysystem parts.

To start the engine1. Run the engine of vehicle B at

moderately high speed.2. Start the engine of vehicle A.3. Run both vehicles for a minimum of

three minutes before disconnecting thecables.

CAUTIONDo not switch on the headlamps whendisconnecting the cables. The peakvoltage could blow the bulbs.

Disconnect the cables in the reverse order.

CHANGING THE VEHICLEBATTERY

CAUTIONFor vehicles with Start-stop thebattery requirement is different. Itmust be replaced by one of exactly

the same specification as the original.

Note: Where applicable, the audio systemmust be reprogrammed with the keycode.The battery is located in the enginecompartment. See Maintenance (page190).

BATTERY CONNECTIONPOINTS

CAUTIONDo not connect to the negative (–)terminal of the flat battery.

E130431

The ground connection point is located tothe right of the battery near the enginecompartment fuse box.

207

Vehicle battery

Page 210: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTIONSUse only approved wheel and tyresizes. Using other sizes could damagethe vehicle and will make the National

Type Approval invalid.If you change the diameter of the tyresfrom that fitted at the factory, thespeedometer may not display the

correct speed. Take the vehicle to yourdealer to have the engine managementsystem reprogrammed.

If you intend to change the size of thewheels from that fitted at the factory,check the suitability with your dealer.

Note: Check your tyre pressures regularlyto optimise fuel economy.A decal with tyre pressure data is locatedin the driver’s door opening at the B-pillar.Check and set the tyre pressure at theambient temperature in which you areintending to drive the vehicle and when thetyres are cold.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEELLocking wheel nutsYou can obtain a replacement lockingwheel nut key and replacement lockingwheel nuts from your dealer using thereference number certificate.

Vehicles with a spare wheelIf the spare wheel is exactly the same typeand size as the other fitted road wheels,you can replace the existing road wheelwith the spare wheel and continue to drivein the normal manner.If the spare wheel is different to the otherroad wheels, it will carry a yellow label withthe appropriate speed limit.

Refer to the following information beforechanging the road wheel.

WARNINGSDrive the shortest possible distances.

Do not fit more than one spare wheelon your vehicle at any one time.Do not carry out any tyre repairs ona spare wheel.Do not drive through an automaticcar wash.If you are unsure what type of sparewheel you have do not exceed 80km/h (50 mph).Only fit snow chains to specifiedtyres. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 218).

CAUTIONThe ground clearance of your vehiclemay be reduced. Take care whenparking next to a kerb.

Note: Your vehicle may exhibit someunusual driving characteristics.

Vehicle jackWARNINGS

The vehicle jack supplied with yourvehicle should only be used whenchanging a wheel in emergency

situations.Before using the vehicle jack, checkthat it is not damaged or deformedand that the thread is lubricated and

free from foreign matter.Never place anything between thejack and the ground, or the jack andthe vehicle.

208

Wheels and Tyres

Page 211: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: Vehicles with a tyre repair kit are notequipped with a vehicle jack or a wheelbrace.It is recommended to use a workshop typehydraulic jack for changing betweensummer and winter tyres.Note: Use a jack with a minimum liftingcapacity of 1.5 tonnes and a lifting plate witha minimum diameter of 80 millimetres (3.1inches).

Vehicles without tyre repair kitYour vehicle jack, wheel brace, screw-intowing eye and wheel trim remover arelocated in the spare wheel well.

Jacking and lifting pointsCAUTION

Use only the specified jacking points.If you use other positions, you maydamage the body, steering,

suspension, engine, braking system or thefuel lines.

E92658

A

B

Emergency use onlyAMaintenanceB

209

Wheels and Tyres

Page 212: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E93302

A

Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills Ashow the location of the jacking points.

E92932

E93020

Assembling the wheel braceType one

WARNINGWhen returning the wheel braceextension to its original position, takecare not to get your fingers caught.

Note: Make sure that the wheel brace isfully extended.

E122546

Extend the wheel brace.

Type two

CAUTIONThe screw-in towing eye has aleft-hand thread. Turn itanti-clockwise to install it. Make sure

that the towing eye is fully tightened.

E122502

Insert the screw-in towing eye into thewheel brace.

210

Wheels and Tyres

Page 213: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Removing the wheel trimType oneInsert the flat end of the wheel bracebetween the rim and the trim and carefullyremove the trim.

Type two

E122314

2

1

1. Insert the wheel trim remover.2. Remove the wheel trim.Note: Make sure that you pull the wheeltrim remover at right angles to the trim.

Removing a road wheelWARNINGS

Park your vehicle in such a positionthat neither the traffic nor you arehindered or endangered.Set up a warning triangle.

Make sure that the vehicle is on firm,level ground with the wheels pointingstraight ahead.Switch off the ignition and apply theparking brake.

WARNINGSIf your vehicle has a manualtransmission, select first or reversegear. If it has an automatic

transmission, select park.Have the passengers leave thevehicle.Secure the diagonally oppositewheel with an appropriate block orwheel chock.Make sure that the arrows ondirectional tyres point in the directionof rotation when the vehicle is

moving forwards. If you have to fit a sparewheel with the arrows pointing in theopposite direction, have the tyre refittedin the correct direction by a properlytrained technician.

Do not work underneath the vehiclewhen it is supported only by a jack.Make sure that the jack is vertical tothe jacking point and the base is flaton the ground.

CAUTIONDo not lay alloy wheels face down onthe ground, this will damage the paint.

Note: The spare wheel is located under thefloor cover in the luggage compartment.1. Install the locking wheel nut key.

211

Wheels and Tyres

Page 214: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E121887

1

2

2. Slacken the wheel nuts.3. Jack up the vehicle until the tyre is clear

of the ground.4. Remove the wheel nuts and the wheel.

Installing a road wheelWARNINGS

Use only approved wheel and tyresizes. Using other sizes coulddamage the vehicle and will make

the National Type Approval invalid. SeeTechnical Specifications (page 218).

Do not fit run flat tyres on vehiclesthat were not originally fitted withthem. Please contact your dealer for

more details regarding compatibility.

CAUTIONDo not install alloy wheels usingwheel nuts designed for use with steelwheels.

Note: The wheel nuts of alloy wheels andspoked steel wheels can also be used forthe steel spare wheel for a short time(maximum two weeks).Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contactsurfaces are free from foreign matter.Note: Make sure that the cones on thewheel nuts are against the wheel.1. Install the wheel.2. Install the wheel nuts finger tight.3. Install the locking wheel nut key.

1

2

3 4

5

E75442

4. Partially tighten the wheel nuts in thesequence shown.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.6. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in the

sequence shown. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 218).

7. Install the wheel trim using the ball ofyour hand.

212

Wheels and Tyres

Page 215: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

WARNINGHave the wheel nuts checked fortightness and the tyre pressurechecked as soon as possible.

TYRE REPAIR KITYour vehicle may not have a spare tyre. Inthis case it will have an emergency tyrerepair kit that can be used to repair oneflat tyre.The tyre repair kit is located in the sparewheel well.

General informationWARNINGS

Depending on the type and extent oftyre damage, some tyres can only bepartially sealed or not sealed at all.

Loss of tyre pressure can affect vehiclehandling, leading to loss of vehicle control.

Do not use the tyre repair kit if thetyre has already been damaged as aresult of being driven under inflated.Do not use the tyre repair kit on runflat tyres.Do not try to seal damage other thanthat located within the visible treadof the tyre.Do not try to seal damage to thetyre’s sidewall.

The tyre repair kit seals most tyrepunctures [with a diameter of up to sixmillimetres (1/4 inch)] to temporarilyrestore mobility.Observe the following rules when using thekit:

• Drive with caution and avoidmaking sudden steering or drivingmanoeuvres, especially if the vehicleis heavily loaded or you are towing atrailer.

• The kit will provide you with anemergency temporary repair, enablingyou to continue your journey to the nextvehicle or tyre dealer, or to drive amaximum distance of 200 kilometres(125 miles).

• Do not exceed a maximum speed of80 km/h (50 mph).

• Keep the kit out of the reach ofchildren.

• Only use the kit when the ambienttemperature is between –30°C (-22°F)and +70°C (+158°F).

Using the tyre repair kitWARNINGS

Compressed air can act as anexplosive or propellant.Never leave the tyre repair kitunattended while in use.

CAUTIONDo not keep the compressor operatingfor more than 10 minutes.

Note: Use the tyre repair kit only for thevehicle with which it was supplied.• Park your vehicle at the roadside so

that you do not obstruct the flow oftraffic and so that you are able to usethe kit without being in danger.

• Apply the parking brake, even if youhave parked on a level road, to makesure that the vehicle will not move.

• Do not attempt to remove foreignobjects like nails or screws penetratingthe tyre.

213

Wheels and Tyres

Page 216: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

• Leave the engine running while the kitis in use, but not if the vehicle is in anenclosed or poorly ventilated area (forexample, inside a building). In thesecircumstances, switch the compressoron with the engine turned off.

• Replace the sealant bottle with a newone before the expiry date (see top ofbottle) is reached.

• Inform all other users of the vehiclethat the tyre has been temporarilysealed with the tyre repair kit and makethem aware of the special drivingconditions to be observed.

Inflating the tyreWARNINGS

Check the sidewall of the tyre priorto inflation. If there are any cracks,bumps or similar damage, do not

attempt to inflate the tyre.Do not stand directly beside the tyrewhile the compressor is pumping.Watch the sidewall of the tyre. If anycracks, bumps or similar damageappear, turn off the compressor and

let the air out by means of the pressurerelief valve B. Do not continue driving withthis tyre.

The sealant contains natural rubberlatex. Avoid contact with skin andclothing. If this happens, rinse the

affected areas immediately with plenty ofwater and contact your doctor.

If the tyre inflation pressure does notreach 1.8 bar (26 psi) within sevenminutes, the tyre may have suffered

excessive damage, making a temporaryrepair impossible. In this case, do notcontinue driving with this tyre.

CAUTIONScrewing the bottle onto the bottleholder will pierce the seal of thebottle. Do not unscrew the bottle from

the holder as the sealant will escape.

E94973

BJ

I

FE

C

KA

G

H

D

Protective capAPressure relief valveBHoseCOrange capDBottle holderEPressure gaugeF

214

Wheels and Tyres

Page 217: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Power plug with cableGCompressor switchHLabelIBottle lidJSealant bottleK

1. Open the lid of the tyre repair kit.2. Peel off the label I showing the

maximum permissible speed of80 km/h (50 mph) from the casing andattach it to the instrument panel in thedriver’s field of view. Make sure thelabel does not obscure anythingimportant.

3. Take the hose C and the power plugwith cable G out of the kit.

4. Unscrew the orange cap D and thebottle lid J.

5. Screw the sealant bottle K clockwiseinto the bottle holder E fully tight.

6. Remove the valve cap from thedamaged tyre.

7. Detach the protective cap A from thehose C and screw the hose C firmlyonto the valve of the damaged tyre.

8. Make sure that the compressor switchH is in position 0.

9. Insert the power plug G into the cigarlighter socket or auxiliary power socket.See Cigar Lighter (page 111). SeeAuxiliary Power Points (page 111).

10. Start the engine.11. Move the compressor switch H to

position 1.12. Inflate the tyre for no longer than

seven minutes to an inflation pressureof minimum 1.8 bar (26 psi) and amaximum of 3.5 bar (51 psi). Movethe compressor switch H to position0 and check the current tyre pressurewith pressure gauge F.

13. Remove the power plug G from thecigar lighter socket or auxiliary powersocket.

14. Quickly unscrew the hose C from thetyre valve and replace the protectivecap A. Fasten the valve cap again.

15. Leave the sealant bottle K in thebottle holder E.

16. Make sure the kit, the bottle lid andthe orange cap are stored safely, butstill easily accessible in the vehicle.The kit will be required again whenyou check the tyre pressure.

17. Immediately drive approximatelythree kilometres (two miles) so thatthe sealant can seal the damagedarea.

Note: When pumping in the sealant throughthe tyre valve, the pressure may rise up to6 bar (87 psi) but will drop again after about30 seconds.

WARNINGIf you experience heavy vibrations,unsteady steering behaviour ornoises while driving, reduce your

speed and drive with caution to a placewhere it is safe for you to stop the vehicle.Recheck the tyre and its pressure. If thetyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar (19 psi) orif there are any cracks, bumps or similardamage visible, do not continue drivingwith this tyre.

Checking the tyre pressure1. Stop the vehicle after driving

approximately three kilometres(two miles). Check, and wherenecessary, adjust the pressure of thedamaged tyre.

2. Attach the kit and read the tyrepressure from the pressure gauge F.

215

Wheels and Tyres

Page 218: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

3. If the pressure of the sealant-filled tyreis 1.3 bar (19 psi) or more, adjust it tothe specified pressure. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 218).

4. Follow the inflation procedure onceagain to top up the tyre.

5. Check the tyre pressure again from thepressure gauge F. If the tyre pressureis too high, deflate the tyre to thespecified pressure using the pressurerelief valve B.

6. Once you have inflated the tyre to itscorrect tyre pressure, move thecompressor switch H to position 0,remove the power plug G from thesocket, unscrew the hose C, fasten thevalve cap and replace the protectivecap A.

7. Leave the sealant bottle K in the bottleholder E and store the kit away safelyin its original location.

8. Drive to the nearest tyre specialist toget the damaged tyre replaced. Beforethe tyre is removed from the rim, informyour tyre dealer that the tyre containssealant. Renew the kit as soon aspossible after it has been used once.

Note: Remember that emergency roadsidetyre repair kits only provide temporarymobility. Regulations concerning tyre repairafter usage of tyre repair kit may differ fromcountry to country. You should consult atyre specialist for advice.

WARNINGBefore driving, make sure the tyre isadjusted to the recommendedinflation pressure. See Technical

Specifications (page 218). Monitor thetyre pressure until the sealed tyre isreplaced.

Empty sealant bottles can be disposed oftogether with normal household waste.Return remains of sealant to your dealeror dispose of it in compliance with localwaste disposal regulations.

TYRE CARE

E70415

To make sure the front and rear tyres ofyour vehicle wear evenly and last longer,we recommend that you swap the tyresfrom front to rear and vice versa at regularintervals of between 5000 and 10000kilometres (3000 and 6000 miles).

CAUTIONDo not scrub the sidewalls of the tyreswhen you are parking.

If you have to mount a kerb, do so slowlyand approach it with the wheels atright-angles to the kerb.Examine the tyres regularly for cuts, foreignobjects and uneven wear of the tread.Uneven wear could mean that the wheelalignment is outside specification.Check the tyre pressures (including thespare) when cold, every two weeks.

216

Wheels and Tyres

Page 219: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

USING WINTER TYRES

CAUTIONMake sure that you use the correctwheel nuts for the type of wheel thewinter tyres are fitted to.

If winter tyres are used, make sure that thetyre pressures are correct. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 218).

USING SNOW CHAINS

WARNINGSDo not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph).

Do not use snow chains on snow-freeroads.Only fit snow chains to specifiedtyres. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 218).

CAUTIONIf your vehicle is fitted with wheeltrims, remove them before fittingsnow chains.

Note: The ABS will continue to operatenormally.Only use small link snow chains.Only use snow chains on the front wheels.

Vehicles with stability control(ESP)Vehicles with stability control (ESP) mayexhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics which can be reduced byswitching traction control off. See UsingStability Control (page 133).

TYRE PRESSUREMONITORING SYSTEM

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to regularly checkthe tyre pressures.The system will only provide a lowtyre pressure warning. It will notinflate the tyres.Do not drive on significantlyunder-inflated tyres. This may causethe tyres to overheat and fail.

Under-inflation reduces fuel efficiency, tyretread life and may also affect your abilityto drive the vehicle safely.

CAUTIONSDo not bend or damage the valveswhen you are inflating the tyres.Have tyres installed by properlytrained technicians.

The Deflation Detection System will alertyou if there is a change of air pressure inany tyre. It does this by using the ABSsensors to detect the rolling circumferenceof the wheels. When the circumferencechanges, this indicates low pressure in atyre, a warning message is displayed in theinformation display and the messageindicator will illuminate. See InformationMessages (page 83).If a low pressure warning message isdisplayed in the information display, checkthe tyre pressures as soon as possible andinflate them to the recommendedpressure. See Technical Specifications(page 218).If this happens frequently, have the causedetermined and rectified as soon aspossible.

217

Wheels and Tyres

Page 220: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Apart from a too low tyre pressure or adamaged tyre, the following situations canaffect the rolling circumference:• Vehicle load is uneven.• When using a trailer or travelling up and

down an incline.• Using snow chains.• Driving on soft surfaces such as snow

or mud.Note: The system will still functioncorrectly, but there may be an increaseddetection time.

System resetNote: Do not reset the system when thevehicle is moving.Note: You should reset the systemfollowing any adjustment to the tyrepressures or any changing of tyres.Note: Turn the ignition on.

1. Using the information display control,navigate to Settings > Driver assist> Deflation detection

2. Press and hold the OK button untilconfirmation appears.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWheel nut torque

Nm (Ib-ft)Wheel type

130 (96)All

Tyre pressures (cold tyres)Up to 80 km/h (50 mph)

Full loadNormal load

Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

4.2 (61)4.2 (61)4.2 (61)4.2 (61)T125/80 R 16All

4.2 (61)4.2 (61)4.2 (61)4.2 (61)T125/90 R 16All

218

Wheels and Tyres

Page 221: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Up to 160 km/h (100 mph)

Full loadNormal load

Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront

bar (psi)bar (psi)bar (psi)bar (psi)

2.8 (41)2.4 (35)2.1 (31)2.1 (31)205/55 R 16*All

2.8 (41)2.4 (35)2.1 (31)2.1 (31)215/55 R 16*

1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT - Sigma, 1.6LEcoBoost - Sigma,2.0L Duratec-HE -MI4, 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi - DV

2.8 (41)2.4 (35)2.1 (31)2.3 (33)215/55 R 16*2.0L Duratorq-TDCi- DW

2.8 (41)2.4 (35)2.1 (31)2.1 (31)215/50 R 17

1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT - Sigma, 1.6LEcoBoost - Sigma,2.0L Duratec-HE -MI4, 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi - DV

2.8 (41)2.4 (35)2.1 (31)2.3 (33)215/50 R 172.0L Duratorq-TDCi- DW

2.8 (41)2.4 (35)2.1 (31)2.1 (31)235/40 R 18

1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT - Sigma, 1.6LEcoBoost - Sigma,2.0L Duratec-HE -MI4, 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi - DV

2.8 (41)2.4 (35)2.1 (31)2.3 (33)235/40 R 182.0L Duratorq-TDCi- DW

*Only fit snow chains to specified tyres.

219

Wheels and Tyres

Page 222: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Continuous speed in excess of 160 km/h (100 mph)

Full loadNormal load

Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront

bar (psi)bar (psi)bar (psi)bar (psi)

2.8 (41)2.4 (35)2.1 (31)2.1 (31)205/55 R 161.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT - Sigma, 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi - DV

2.8 (41)2.4 (35)2.1 (31)2.2 (32)205/55 R 161.6L EcoBoost -Sigma,

2.8 (41)2.4 (35)2.1 (31)2.1 (31)215/55 R 16

1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT - Sigma, 1.6LEcoBoost - Sigma,2.0L Duratec-HE -MI4, 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi - DV

2.8 (41)2.6 (38)2.1 (31)2.3 (33)215/55 R 162.0L Duratorq-TDCi- DW

2.8 (41)2.4 (35)2.1 (31)2.1 (31)215/50 R 17

1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT - Sigma, 1.6LEcoBoost - Sigma,2.0L Duratec-HE -MI4, 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi - DV

2.8 (41)2.6 (38)2.1 (31)2.3 (33)215/50 R 172.0L Duratorq-TDCi- DW

2.8 (41)2.4 (35)2.1 (31)2.1 (31)235/40 R 18

1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT - Sigma, 1.6LEcoBoost - Sigma,2.0L Duratec-HE -MI4, 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi - DV

2.8 (41)2.6 (38)2.1 (31)2.3 (33)235/40 R 182.0L Duratorq-TDCi- DW

220

Wheels and Tyres

Page 223: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONPLATE

Note: The vehicle identification platedesign may vary to that shown.Note: The information shown on the vehicleidentification plate is dependant uponmarket requirements.

E135662

B C ED

F

G

H

I

A

ModelAVariantBEngine designationCEmission levelDVehicle identification numberEGross vehicle weightFGross train weightGMaximum front axle weightHMaximum rear axle weightI

The vehicle identification number andmaximum weights are shown on a platelocated on the lock side of the right-handdoor aperture at the bottom.

221

Vehicle identification

Page 224: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER

E87496

The vehicle identification number isstamped into the floor panel on theright-hand side, beside the front seat. It isalso shown on the left-hand side of theinstrument panel.

222

Vehicle identification

Page 225: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSVehicle dimensions4-door

Dimension in mm (inches)Dimension description

4534 (178.5)Maximum length

2010 (79.1)Overall width including exterior mirrors

1451 - 1484 (57.1 - 58.4)Overall height - EC kerb weight

2648 (104.3)Wheelbase

1544 - 1559 (60.8 - 61.4)Front track

1534 - 1549 (60.4 - 61)Rear track

5-door

Dimension in mm (inches)Dimension description

4358 - 4412 (171.6 - 173.7)Maximum length

2010 (79.1)Overall width including exterior mirrors

1451 - 1484 (57.1 - 58.4)Overall height - EC kerb weight

2648 (104.3)Wheelbase

1544 - 1559 (60.8 - 61.4)Front track

1534 - 1549 (60.4 - 61)Rear track

Estate

Dimension in mm (inches)Dimension description

4556 - 4606 (179.4 - 181.3)Maximum length

2010 (79.1)Overall width including exterior mirrors

1472 - 1505 (58 - 59.3)Overall height - EC kerb weight

2648 (104.3)Wheelbase

1544 - 1559 (60.8 - 61.4)Front track

223

Capacities and Specifications

Page 226: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Dimension in mm (inches)Dimension description

1534 - 1549 (60.4 - 61)Rear track

Towing equipment dimensions

A

B

G

F

E

C

D

E132737

224

Capacities and Specifications

Page 227: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

4-door

Dimension in mm (inches)Dimension descriptionItem

77 - 80 (3 - 3.1)Bumper – centre of tow ballA

5 (0.2)Attachment point – centre of tow ballB

1068 - 1071 (42 - 42.2)Wheel centre – centre of tow ballC

518 (20.4)Centre of tow ball – side memberD

1037 (40.8)Distance between side membersE

450 (17.7)Centre of tow ball – centre 1. attachmentpointF

750 (29.5)Centre of tow ball – centre 2. attachmentpointG

5-door

Dimension in mm (inches)Dimension descriptionItem

81 - 83 (3.2 - 3.3)Bumper – centre of tow ballA

5 (0.2)Attachment point – centre of tow ballB

896 - 898 (35.3 - 35.4)Wheel centre – centre of tow ballC

518 (20.4)Centre of tow ball – side memberD

1036 (40.8)Distance between side membersE

420 (16.5)Centre of tow ball – centre 1. attachmentpointF

720 (28.3)Centre of tow ball – centre 2. attachmentpointG

Estate

Dimension in mm (inches)Dimension descriptionItem

81 (3.2)Bumper – centre of tow ballA

76 (3)Attachment point – centre of tow ballB

1094 (43.1)Wheel centre – centre of tow ballC

225

Capacities and Specifications

Page 228: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Dimension in mm (inches)Dimension descriptionItem

590 (23.2)Centre of tow ball – side memberD

1179 (46.4)Distance between side membersE

474 (18.7)Centre of tow ball – centre 1. attachmentpointF

719 (28.3)Centre of tow ball – centre 2. attachmentpointG

226

Capacities and Specifications

Page 229: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

IMPORTANT AUDIOINFORMATION

WARNINGSDue to technical incompatibility,recordable (CD-R) and rewritable(CD-RW) discs may not function

correctly.These CD radio units will playcompact discs that conform to theInternational Red Book standard

audio specification. Copy protected CDsfrom some manufacturers do not conformto this standard and playback cannot beguaranteed.

Dual format, dual sided discs (DVDPlus, CD-DVD format), adopted bythe music industry, are thicker than

normal CDs and consequently playbackcannot be guaranteed, and jamming couldoccur. Irregular shaped CDs and CDs witha scratch protection film or self adhesivelabels attached should not be used.Warranty claims, where this type of disc isfound to be inside an audio unit returnedfor repair, will not be accepted.

All CD units are designed to playcommercially pressed 12 cm audiocompact discs only.The audio unit may be damaged ifunsuitable items like credit cards orcoins are pushed inside the CD

aperture.

Audio unit labels

E66256

E66257

Disc labelsAudio CD

E66254

MP3

E66255

227

Audio introduction

Page 230: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: Units have an integrated multifunction display situated above the CDaperture. This shows important informationregarding control of your audio unit.Additionally, there are various icons placedaround the display screen which light upwhen a function is active (for example CD,Radio or Aux.)Type 1

A B ED

FO

G

K

L

M

N

J HI

C

E130324

CD eject. See Compact disc player (page 240).ANavigation arrows.BCD aperture. See Compact disc player (page 240).COK.DInformation.ETraffic announcement. See Traffic information control (page 236).FStation presets. See Station preset buttons (page 236).G

228

Audio unit overview

Page 231: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Seek up. CD track selection. See Station tuning control (page 235). See Trackselection (page 240).

H

On/off and volume control.ISeek down. CD track selection. See Station tuning control (page 235). SeeTrack selection (page 240).

J

Menu select.KSound button. See Sound button (page 235).LAuxiliary select. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 113). SeeAuxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 243).

M

Radio and waveband select. See Audio unit operation (page 235).NCD select. See Compact disc player (page 240).O

Type 2

E104157 A

1 2 3 4

Descriptions for function buttons1-4

A

229

Audio unit overview

Page 232: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

A B EDT

H

F

G

P

Q

R

S

MO N J IKL

C

E130142

CD eject. See Compact disc player (page 240).ANavigation arrows.BCD aperture. See Compact disc player (page 240).COK.DInformation.ETraffic announcement. See Traffic information control (page 236).FSound button. See Sound button (page 235).GTelephone keypad and station presets. See Using the telephone (page 246).See Station preset buttons (page 236).

H

Function 4.IFunction 3.JSeek up. CD track selection. See Station tuning control (page 235). See Trackselection (page 240).

K

230

Audio unit overview

Page 233: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

On/off and volume control.LSeek down. CD track selection. See Station tuning control (page 235). SeeTrack selection (page 240).

M

Function 2.NFunction 1.OMenu select.PPhone menu. See Telephone (page 245).QAuxiliary, USB and iPod select. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page113). See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 243). See Connectivity(page 265).

R

Radio and waveband select. See Audio unit operation (page 235).SCD select. See Compact disc player (page 240).T

Function buttons 1 to 4 are contextdependent, and change according to thecurrent unit mode. Descriptions for thefunctions are shown at the bottom of thescreen display.

Type 3

E104157 A

1 2 3 4

Descriptions for function buttons1-4

A

231

Audio unit overview

Page 234: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E129074

A CB FE

Y

I

G

H

J

L

KT

U

W

X

V

QS R N MOP

D

On/off control.ADisplay select.BTelephone keypad and station presets. See Using the telephone (page 246).See Station preset buttons (page 236).

C

CD aperture. See Compact disc player (page 240).DNavigation arrows.EDSP select. See Digital signal processing (DSP) (page 238).FCD eject. See Compact disc player (page 240).GInformation.HClock.ISeek up. CD track selection. End call. See Station tuning control (page 235).See Track selection (page 240). See Using the telephone (page 246).

J

Mute.K

232

Audio unit overview

Page 235: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Traffic announcement. See Traffic information control (page 236).LFunction 4.MSound button. See Sound button (page 235).NFunction 3.OOK.PFunction 2.QMenu select.RFunction 1.SPhone menu. See Telephone (page 245).TAuxiliary select. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 113). SeeAuxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 243).

U

Seek down. CD track selection. Accept call. See Station tuning control (page235). See Track selection (page 240). See Using the telephone (page 246).

V

Radio and waveband select. See Audio unit operation (page 235).WCD select. See Compact disc player (page 240).XVolume control.Y

Function buttons 1 to 4 are contextdependent, and change according to thecurrent unit mode. Descriptions for thefunctions are shown at the bottom of thescreen display.

233

Audio unit overview

Page 236: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

SECURITY CODEEach unit incorporates a unique code thatis linked to the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN). The system willautomatically check that the audio unitand vehicle match before allowingoperation.If a security code message appears, pleasesee your dealer.

234

Audio system security

Page 237: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

ON/OFF CONTROLPress the on/off control. This will alsooperate the unit for up to one hour with theignition turned off.The radio will switch off automaticallyafter one hour.

SOUND BUTTONThis will allow you to adjust the soundsettings (for example bass and treble).1. Press the sound button.2. Use the up and down arrow buttons to

select the required setting.3. Use the left and right arrow buttons to

make the necessary adjustment. Thedisplay indicates the level selected.

4. Press the OK button to confirm thenew settings.

WAVEBAND BUTTONPress the RADIO button to select from thewavebands available.The selector can also be used to return toradio reception when you have beenlistening to another source.Alternatively, press the left arrow buttonto display the available wavebands. Scrollto the required waveband and press OK.

STATION TUNING CONTROLDAB service linkingNote: The DAB service linking is as perdefault off.Note: Service linking allowscross-referencing to other correspondingfrequencies of the same station, for exampleFM and other DAB ensembles.

Note: The system will automaticallychange to another corresponding station ifthe current one becomes unavailable, forexample when leaving the coverage area.Switching DAB service linking on and off.See General Information (page 75).

Seek tuningSelect a waveband and briefly press oneof the seek buttons. The unit will stop atthe first station it finds in the direction youhave chosen.

Manual tuningType 11. Press the MENU button.2. Select RADIO mode and then MANUAL

TUNE.3. Use the left and right arrow buttons to

tune down or up the waveband in smallincrements or press and hold toincrement quickly, until you find astation you want to listen to.

4. Press OK to continue listening to astation.

Type 2 and 31. Press function button 2.2. Use the left and right arrow buttons to

tune down or up the waveband in smallincrements or press and hold toincrement quickly, until you find astation you want to listen to.

3. Press OK to continue listening to astation.

Scan tuningScan allows you to listen to a few secondsof each station detected.

Type 11. Press the MENU button.

235

Audio unit operation

Page 238: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

2. Select RADIO mode and then SCAN.3. Use the seek buttons to scan up or

down the selected waveband.4. Press OK to continue listening to a

station.

Type 2 and 31. Press function button 3.2. Use the seek buttons to scan up or

down the selected waveband.3. Press function button 3 again or OK to

continue listening to a station.

STATION PRESET BUTTONSThis feature allows you to store yourfavourite stations so that they can berecalled by selecting the appropriatewaveband and pressing one of the presetbuttons.1. Select a waveband.2. Tune to the station required.3. Press and hold one of the preset

buttons. A progress bar and messagewill appear. When the progress barcompletes the station has been stored.The audio unit will also mutemomentarily as confirmation.

This can be repeated on each wavebandand for each preset button.Note: When you drive to another part of thecountry, FM and DAB stations thatbroadcast on alternative frequencies, andare stored on preset buttons, may beupdated with the correct frequency andstation name for that area.

AUTOSTORE CONTROLNote: This will store up to a maximum ofthe 10 strongest signals available, eitherfrom the AM or the FM waveband, andoverwrite the previously stored stations. Itcan also be used to store stations manuallyin the same way as other wavebands.Note: On type 3 you must select either FMAST or AM AST to use this function.• Press and hold function button 1 or the

RADIO button.• When the search is complete, sound is

restored and the strongest signals arestored on the Autostore presets.

TRAFFIC INFORMATIONCONTROLMany stations that broadcast on the FMwaveband have a TP code to signify thatthey carry traffic programme information.

Activating traffic announcementsBefore you can receive trafficannouncements, you must press either theTA or TRAFFIC button. A ‘TA’ display willappear to show the feature is switched on.If you are already tuned to a station thatbroadcasts traffic information, ‘TP’ willalso be displayed. Otherwise the unit willsearch for a traffic programme.When traffic information is broadcast, itwill automatically interrupt normal radioor CD playback and ‘Traffic announcement(TA)’ will appear in the display.If a non-traffic station is selected orrecalled using a preset button, the audiounit will remain on that station unless TAor TRAFFIC is turned off, then on again.Note: If TA is on and you select a preset ormanual tune to a non TA station no trafficannouncement will be heard.

236

Audio unit operation

Page 239: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: When you are listening to a non TAstation and turn TA off and on again a TPseek will occur.

Traffic announcement volumeTraffic announcements interrupt normalbroadcasts at a preset minimum level thatis usually louder than normal listeningvolumes.To adjust the preset volume:• Use the volume control to make the

necessary adjustment during anincoming TA broadcast. The displaywill show the level selected.

Ending traffic announcementsThe audio unit will return to normaloperation at the end of each trafficannouncement. To end the announcementprematurely, press TA or TRAFFIC duringthe announcement.Note: If you press TA or TRAFFIC at anyother time it will switch all announcementsoff.

237

Audio unit operation

Page 240: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

AUTOMATIC VOLUMECONTROLWhen available, automatic volume control(AVC) adjusts the volume level tocompensate for engine noise and roadspeed noise.1. Press the MENU button and select

AUDIO.2. Select AVC LEVEL or ADAPTIVE VOL.3. Use the left or right arrow button to

adjust the setting.4. Press the OK button to confirm your

selection.5. Press the MENU button to return.

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING(DSP)DSP occupancyThis feature takes into account thedifferences in distance from the variousspeakers in the vehicle to each seat. Selectthe sitting position for which the audio isto be correctly enhanced.

DSP equaliserSelect the music category that most suitsyour listening preference. The audio outputwill change to enhance the particular styleof music chosen.

Changing the DSP settings1. Press the MENU button.2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.3. Scroll to the required DSP function.4. Use the up and down arrow buttons to

select the required setting.5. Press the OK button to confirm your

selection.6. Press the MENU button to return.

NEWS BROADCASTSSome audio units interrupt normalreception to broadcast news bulletins fromstations on the FM waveband or radio datasystem (RDS) and enhanced othernetwork (EON) linked stations, in the sameway as traffic information is provided.During news broadcasts, the display willindicate there is an incomingannouncement. News interrupts arebroadcast at the same preset volume levelas traffic announcements.1. Press the MENU button.2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.3. Scroll to NEWS and turn on or off with

the OK button.4. Press the MENU button to return.

ALTERNATIVE FREQUENCIESMany programmes that broadcast on theFM waveband have a programmeidentification (PI) code, which can berecognised by audio units.If your radio has alternative frequencies(AF) tuning switched on and you movefrom one transmission area to another, thisfacility will search for and switch to astronger station signal, if one can be found.Under certain conditions, however, AFtuning may temporarily disrupt normalreception.When selected, the unit continuallyevaluates signal strength and, if a bettersignal becomes available, the unit willswitch to that alternative. It mutes whileit checks a list of alternative frequenciesand, if necessary, it will search once acrossthe selected waveband for a genuinealternative frequency.

238

Audio unit menus

Page 241: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

It will restore radio reception when it findsone or, if one is not found, the unit willreturn to the original stored frequency.When selected, ‘AF’ will be shown in thedisplay.1. Press the MENU button.2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO MENU.3. Scroll to ALTERNAT FREQ. or

ALTERNATIVE FREQ. and turn on or offwith the OK button.

4. Press the MENU button to return.

REGIONAL MODE (REG)Regional mode (REG) controls thebehaviour of AF switching betweenregionally related networks of a parentbroadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairlylarge network across a large part of thecountry. At various times of the day thislarge network may be broken down into anumber of smaller regional networks,typically centred on major towns or cities.When the network is not split into regionalvariants, the whole network caries thesame programming.Regional mode ON: This prevents 'random'AF switches when neighbouring regionalnetworks are not carrying the sameprogramming.Regional mode OFF: This allows a largercoverage area if neighbouring regionalnetworks are carrying the sameprogramming, but can cause 'random' AFswitches if they are not.1. Press the MENU button.2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.3. Scroll to RDS REGIONAL and turn on

or off with the OK button.4. Press the MENU button to return.

239

Audio unit menus

Page 242: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

COMPACT DISC PLAYBACKNote: During playback, the display indicatesthe disc, track and time that has elapsedsince the start of the track.During radio reception, press the CD buttononce to start CD playback.Playback will start immediately after a discis loaded.

TRACK SELECTION• Press the seek up button once to move

to the next track or press it repeatedlyto access later tracks.

• Press the seek down button once toreplay the current track. If pressedwithin two seconds of the start of atrack, the previous track will beselected.

• Press the seek down button repeatedlyto select previous tracks.

• Press the up or down arrow buttons,and using the OK button, select therequired track.

Type 2 and 3The desired track number may be enteredusing the numeric keypad. Dial the requiredtrack number until complete (for example1 then 2 for track 12), or dial the numberand directly press OK.

FAST FORWARD/REVERSEPress and hold the seek down or upbuttons to search backwards or forwardswithin the tracks on the disc.

SHUFFLE/RANDOMRandom track playback, also known asshuffle, plays all tracks on the CD inrandom order.

Type 11. Press the MENU button and select CD

MODE.2. Select SHUFFLE, which then enables

the function to be selected on or off.When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SHUFFLE for the whole CD, or toplay all the tracks in the folder in a randomorder.

Type 2 and 3Press function button 2.Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SHUFFLE for the whole CD, or toplay all the tracks in the folder in a randomorder. Repeat presses of function button 2will toggle these options.Use the seek up or down button to selectthe next track to shuffle if required.

REPEAT COMPACT DISCTRACKSType 11. Press the MENU button and select CD

MODE.2. Select REPEAT, which then enables

the function to be selected on or off.The track will replay once ended.

When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude REPEAT for the track, or to repeatall the tracks in the folder.

Type 2 and 3Press function button 1.

240

Compact disc player

Page 243: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude REPEAT for the track, or to repeatall the tracks in the folder. Repeat pressesof function button 1 will toggle theseoptions.

COMPACT DISC TRACKSCANNINGThe SCAN function allows you to previeweach track for approximately 5 seconds.

Type 1Various scan modes are possible,according to the type of CD currentlyplaying.1. Press the MENU button and select CD

MODE.2. Select SCAN, which then enables the

function to be selected on or off.Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SCAN for the CD, or just the tracksin the folder.3. Press the OK button to stop the scan

mode.

Type 2 and 31. Press function button 3.Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SCAN for the CD, or just the tracksin the folder. Repeat presses of functionbutton 3 will toggle these options.2. Press function button 3 again to stop

the scan mode.

MP3 FILE PLAYBACKNote: Some copy protected audio files maynot be read by the CD player.The CD player also supports MP3 andWMA format audio files.

When a CD containing audio is insertedinto the CD player the disc's directorystructure is read in. It may take a whilebefore playback starts and is dependanton the quality of the disc.MP3 tracks may be recorded on the CD inseveral ways. They can all be placed in theroot directory like a conventional audio CD,or they can be placed in folders that mayrepresent, for example, an album, an artist,or a genre.

Playing a multi session discThe normal playing sequence on CD's withmultiple folders is to play the tracks in thefirst folder, then the tracks in any foldersnested inside the first folder, then moveonto the second folder, and so on. Forexample, if folder 1 has folders 1a and 1bwithin it, and folder 2 contains folder 2a,the playing sequence will be folder 1, 1a, 1b,2, 2a.When the playback of a file is finished theplayback of the other files in the samedirectory continues. Directory change takesplace automatically when all files in thecurrent directory have been played back.

MP3 DISPLAY OPTIONSWhen an MP3 disc is playing, certaininformation encoded in each track can bedisplayed. Such information will normallyinclude:• The file name• The folder name• ID3 information which might be the

album or artist’s name.The unit will normally show the file namethat is playing. To select one of the otheritems of information, press the INFObutton repeatedly until the required itemis shown in the display.

241

Compact disc player

Page 244: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: If the ID3 information selected isunavailable, NO MP3 TAG will be shown inthe display.

CD text display optionsWhen an audio disc with CD text is playing,limited information encoded in each trackcan be displayed. Such information willnormally include:• The disc name• The artist name• The track name.Note: These display options are selectedin the same way as MP3 displays. NO DISCNAME or NO TRACK NAME will be shownin the display if no information has beenencoded.

ENDING COMPACT DISCPLAYBACKTo restore radio reception on all units:• Press the RADIO button.Note: This will not eject the CD; the discwill merely pause at the point where radioreception was restored.To resume CD playback, press the CDbutton again.

242

Compact disc player

Page 245: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: For optimum performance whenusing any auxiliary device set the volume onthe device high. This will reduce audiointerference when charging the device viathe vehicle power supply socket.When fitted the Auxiliary input (AUX IN)socket permits an auxiliary device, such asan MP3 player, to be linked into the vehicleaudio system. Output can be playedthrough the vehicle speakers.To connect an auxiliary device, plug it intothe AUX IN socket using a 3.5 mmconventional audio jack connector.Select the auxiliary input via the AUXbutton and playback will be heard throughthe vehicle speakers. LINE IN or LINE INACTIVE will appear in the vehicle audiounit display. Volume, treble and bass canbe adjusted on the vehicle audio unit asnormal.The vehicle audio unit buttons can also beused to restore playback from the vehicleaudio unit, while the auxiliary deviceremains connected.

243

Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket

Page 246: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

RectificationAudio unit display

General error message for CD fault conditions, such ascannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc. Ensure discis loaded correct way up. Clean and re-try, or replace

disc with known music disc. If error persists contact yourdealer.

PLEASE CHECK CD

General error message for CD fault conditions such aspossible mechanism fault.

CD DRIVE MALFUNCTION

Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work untilit has cooled down.

CD DRIVE HIGH TEMP

General error message for iPod fault conditions, suchas cannot read the data. Ensure iPod is inserted

correctly. If error persists contact your dealer.

IPOD ERROR READING DEVICE

244

Audio troubleshooting

Page 247: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTIONUsing the system with the engine offwill drain the battery.

This section describes the functions andfeatures of the Bluetooth mobile phonehands free system.The Bluetooth mobile phone part of thesystem provides interaction with the audioor navigation system and your mobilephone. It allows you to use the audio ornavigation system to make and receivecalls without having to hold your mobilephone.

Compatibility of phonesCAUTION

As no common agreement exists,mobile phone manufacturers are ableto implement a variety of profiles in

their Bluetooth devices. Because of this,an incompatibility can occur between thephone and hands-free system, which insome cases may significantly degrade thesystem performance. To avoid thissituation, only recommended phonesshould be used.

Please visit the website www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for full details.

BLUETOOTH SETUPBefore you can use your telephone withyour vehicle it must be bonded to thevehicle telephone system.

Handling of phonesUp to six Bluetooth devices can be bondedto the vehicle system.

Note: If there is an ongoing call when thephone in use is selected as the new activephone, the call is transferred to the vehicleaudio system.Note: Even if connected to the car system,your phone can still be used in the usualway.

Requirements for BluetoothconnectionThe following are required before aBluetooth phone connection can be made.1. The Bluetooth feature must be

activated on the phone and on theaudio unit. Make sure the Bluetoothmenu option in the audio unit is set toON. For information on phone settings,refer to your phone user guide.

2. In the Bluetooth menu on your phone,search for Ford Audio and select it.

3. Enter the code number shown on thevehicle display using the phone keypad.If no code number is shown on thedisplay, enter the Bluetooth PINnumber 0000 using the phone keypad.Now enter the Bluetooth PIN numbershown on the vehicle display.

4. If your mobile phone asks you toauthorize the automatic connection,select YES.

Note: A phone call will be disconnected ifthe audio unit is switched off. If the ignitionkey is turned to the off position the phonecall will remain in progress.

TELEPHONE SETUPPhonebookNote: It may be necessary to confirmphonebook access to the Bluetooth systemvia the mobile phone.

245

Telephone

Page 248: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

After start up access to the phonebook listcan be delayed for several minutes,depending upon the size.

Phonebook categoriesThe category is indicated as an icon:

E87990

Phone

E87991

Mobile

E87992

Home

E87993

Office

Making a phone an active phoneNote: If there is an ongoing call when thephone in use is selected as the new activephone, the call is transferred to the vehicleaudio system.When using the system for the first time,no phone is connected to the system.After switching on the ignition and theaudio unit, the Bluetooth phone must bebonded to the system. See Bluetoothsetup (page 245).After bonding a Bluetooth phone to thesystem, this becomes the active phone.For further information refer to the phonemenu.Select the phone from the active phonemenu.Turning the ignition and radio back onagain, the last active phone is picked up bythe system.Note: In some cases the Bluetoothconnection must also be confirmed on thephone.

Bond another Bluetooth phoneBond a new Bluetooth phone as describedin the requirements for a Bluetoothconnection.Phones stored in the system are accessibleby using the phone list on the audio unit.Note: A maximum of six devices may bebonded. If six Bluetooth devices havealready been bonded, one of these has tobe debonded in order to bond a new device.

TELEPHONE CONTROLSRemote control

E129649

BD

E

A

C

Volume upAVoice buttonBEnd callCVolume downDReceive callE

USING THE TELEPHONENote: Refer to your audio guide for detailsof the controls. See Audio unit overview(page 228).

246

Telephone

Page 249: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Note: You can exit the phone menu bypressing any source button CD, RADIO orAUX.Note: When referred to, the use of theup/down arrow buttons, seek up and seekdown buttons, and the OK button can beused on either the steering wheel or theaudio unit.This chapter describes the phone functionsof the audio unit.An active phone must be present.Even if connected to the audio unit, yourphone can still be used in the usual way.

Making a callDialling a number using voice controlPhone numbers can be dialled using voicecontrol. See Telephone commands(page 257).

Dialling a number using the addressbook1. Press the PHONE button.2. Press the up/down arrow buttons until

PHONEBOOK is shown.3. Press the OK button.Note: You can also use the telephonekeypad to select the first letter of the entryyou are looking for. Press the relevantnumber that corresponds to the letterrepeatedly until the required letter isdisplayed.4. Press the up/down arrow buttons to

select the desired phone number.Note: Press and hold the up/down arrowbuttons to search forwards or backwardswithin the phonebook.5. Press the OK button to dial the

selected phone number.

Dialling a number using the telephonekeypad1. Press the PHONE button.2. Dial the number using the telephone

keypad on the audio unit.3. Press the OK button.Note: If you enter an incorrect digit whilstentering a phone number, press functionbutton 3 to erase the last digit. A long presswill erase the complete string of digits.

Ending a callCalls can be ended by:• pressing the seek up button• pressing the OK button• pressing function button 4.

Redialling a number1. Press the PHONE button.2. Press the up/down arrow buttons until

CALL LISTS is displayed.3. Press the OK button.Note: If the active phone does not providea call out list, the last outgoing callnumber/entry can be redialled.4. Press the up/down buttons to select

the desired call list.5. Press the OK button.6. Press the up/down buttons to select

the desired phone number.7. Press the OK button.

Redialling the last dialled number1. Press the PHONE button.2. Press the up/down arrow buttons until

REDIAL is displayed.3. Press the OK button.

247

Telephone

Page 250: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Receiving an incoming callAccepting an incoming callIncoming calls can be accepted by pressingthe seek down button, or by pressing theOK button.

Rejecting an incoming callIncoming calls can be rejected by:• pressing the seek up button, or• pressing the arrow down button to

highlight REJECT and then pressingthe OK button.

Receiving a second incoming callNote: The second incoming call functionmust be activated in your phone.If there is an incoming call whilst there isan ongoing call, a beep will be heard andyou will have the option to end the activecall and to accept the incoming call.

Accepting a second incoming callNote: The first incoming call will bedisconnected and replaced by the secondincoming call.Second incoming calls can be acceptedby pressing the seek down button on thesteering wheel or on the audio unit, or bypressing the OK button on the audio unit.

Rejecting a second incoming callSecond incoming calls can be rejected by:• pressing the seek up button, or• pressing the arrow down button to

highlight REJECT and then pressingthe OK button.

Second incoming calls can be rejected bypressing function button 4.

Muting the microphoneNote: During a call, it is possible to mutethe microphone. Whilst muted, confirmationwill appear in the display.Press function button 1. Press the buttononce again to turn this function off.

Changing the active phoneNote: Phones must be bonded to thesystem before they can be made active.Note: After bonding a phone to the system,this becomes the active phone.1. Press the PHONE button.2. Press the up/down buttons until

SELECT PHONE is shown.3. Press the OK button.4. Scroll through the different stored

phones by using the up/down buttonsto display the bonded phones.

5. Press the OK button to select thephone which is to be the active phone.

Debonding a bonded phoneA bonded phone can be deleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.1. Press the PHONE button.2. Press the up/down buttons until

SELECT PHONE is shown.3. Press the OK button.4. Press the up/down buttons to highlight

the required phone.5. Press function button 1.

248

Telephone

Page 251: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

CAUTIONUsing the system with the engine offwill drain the battery.

Voice recognition enables operation of thesystem without the need to divert yourattention from the road ahead in order tochange settings, or receive feedback fromthe system.Whenever you issue one of the definedcommands with the system active, thevoice recognition system converts yourcommand into a control signal for thesystem. Your inputs take the form ofdialogues or commands. You are guidedthrough these dialogues byannouncements or questions.Please familiarise yourself with thefunctions of the system before using voicerecognition.

Supported commandsThe voice control system allows you tocontrol the following vehicle functions:• Bluetooth phone• radio• CD Player• external device (USB)• external device (iPod)• automatic climate control

System responseAs you work through a voice session thesystem will prompt you with a beep toneeach time the system is ready to proceed.Do not try to give any commands until thebeep tone has been heard. The voicecontrol system will repeat each spokencommand back to you.

If you are not sure how to continue say"HELP" for assistance or "CANCEL" if youdo not wish to continue.The "HELP" function provides only asubset of the available voice commands.Detailed explanations of all possible voicecommands can be found on the followingpages.

Voice commandsAll voice commands should be given usinga natural speaking voice, as if speaking toa passenger or on the phone. Your voicelevel should be dependant on thesurrounding noise level inside or outsidethe vehicle but do not shout.

USING VOICE CONTROLSystem operationThe order and content of the voice controlsare given in the following lists. The tablesshow the sequence of user voicecommands and system responses for eachavailable function.<> indicates a number or stored name tagto be inserted by the user.

Short cutsThere are a number of voice commandshort cuts available, which allow you tocontrol some vehicle features withouthaving to follow the complete commandmenu. These are:• phone: "MOBILE NAME", "DIAL

NUMBER", "DIAL NAME", and "REDIAL"• automatic climate control:

"TEMPERATURE", "AUTO MODE","DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON" and"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"

• radio: "TUNE NAME"• external device (USB): "TRACK"• external device (iPod): "TRACK"

249

Voice control

Page 252: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Start communicating with the systemBefore you can start talking to the systemyou first have to press the VOICE buttonfor each operation and wait until thesystem answers with a beep. See VoiceControl (page 42).Press the button again to cancel the voicesession.

Name tagThe name tag functionality can supportthe phone, audio and navigation featuresby using the "STORE NAME" function. Youcan assign name tags to items such asfavourite radio stations and personalphone contacts. See Audio unitcommands (page 250). See Telephonecommands (page 257).

• Store up to 20 name tags per function.• The average recording time for each

name tag is approximately 2-3seconds.

AUDIO UNIT COMMANDSCD PlayerYou can control playback directly by voicecontrol.

OverviewThe overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"CD PLAYER"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT FOLDER"**

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3.

TrackYou can choose a track on your CD directly.

250

Voice control

Page 253: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

System answerUser saysSteps

"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1

"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"*2

"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"**3

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)

Shuffle allTo set random playback.

System answerUser saysSteps

"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1

"SHUFFLE ALL"2

RadioThe radio voice commands support thefunctionality of the radio and allow you totune radio stations by voice control.

OverviewThe overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu.

"RADIO"

"HELP"

"AM"

"FM"

"TUNE NAME"*

"DELETE NAME"

"DELETE DIRECTORY"

"PLAY DIRECTORY"

"STORE NAME"

251

Voice control

Page 254: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

"RADIO"

"PLAY"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Tune frequencyThis function allows you to tune your radioby voice commands.

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"AM FREQUENCY PLEASE""AM"2

"FM FREQUENCY PLEASE""FM"

"TUNE <frequency>""<frequency>"*3

* The frequency may be entered in a variety of ways. Refer below for representativeexamples.

FM band: 87.5 - 108.0 in increments of 0.1• "Eighty nine point nine" (89.9)• "Ninety" (90.0)• "One hundred point five" (100.5)• "One zero one point one" (101.1)• "One zero eight" (108.0)AM/MW band: 531 - 1602 in increments of9AM/LW band: 153 - 281 in increments of 1

• "Five thirty one" (531)• "Nine hundred" (900)• "Fourteen forty" (1440)• "Fifteen zero three" (1503)• "Ten eighty" (1080)

Store nameIf you have tuned a radio station, you canstore it with a name in the directory.

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"

"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3

"STORING NAME""<name>"4"<name> STORED"

252

Voice control

Page 255: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Tune name This function allows you to call up a storedradio station.

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"NAME PLEASE""TUNE NAME"*2

"TUNE <name>""<name>"3

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Delete nameThis function allows you to delete a storedradio station.

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2

"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DELETED""YES"4

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Play directoryThis function allows you to let the systemtell you all of the stored radio stations.

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"PLAY <DIRECTORY>""PLAY DIRECTORY"2

Delete directoryThis function allows you to delete allstored radio stations at once.

253

Voice control

Page 256: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"RADIO DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

PlayThis function switches the audio source tothe radio mode.

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"PLAY"2

Auxiliary inputThis function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attached auxiliary inputdevice.

System answerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"LINE IN""LINE IN"2

External devices - USBThese voice commands support thefunctionality of an external USB devicewhich may be connected to the audio unit.

OverviewThe overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "USB"

"HELP"

254

Voice control

Page 257: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "USB"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"PLAYLIST"**

"FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"

"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT FOLDER"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Playlists and folders activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames.See General Information (page 265).

USB playThis function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attached USB device.

System answerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"USB""USB"2

"PLAY"3

USB TrackYou can choose a track on your USB devicedirectly.

255

Voice control

Page 258: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

System answerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"USB""USB"2

"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"3

"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"*4

* Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)

External devices - iPodThese voice commands support thefunctionality of an iPod which may beconnected to the audio unit.

OverviewThe overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "IPOD"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"PLAYLIST"**

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See GeneralInformation (page 265).

256

Voice control

Page 259: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

iPod Track You can choose a track off the all titles listof your iPod directly.

System answerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"IPOD""IPOD"2

"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"*3

"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"**4

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to five single digits (for example "5", "2","4", "5", "3" for track 52453), to a limit of 65535.

iPod playlistYou can choose a playlist from your iPoddirectly.

System answerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"IPOD""IPOD"2

"PLAYLIST NUMBER PLEASE""PLAYLIST"*3

"PLAYLIST <number>""<a number between 1 and 10>"4

* Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See GeneralInformation (page 265).

TELEPHONE COMMANDSPhoneYour phone system allows you to createan additional phonebook. The storedentries can be dialled by voice control.Phone numbers stored by using voicecontrol are stored on the vehicle systemand not in your phone.

OverviewThe overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

257

Voice control

Page 260: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

"PHONE"

"HELP"

"MOBILE NAME"*

"DIAL NUMBER"*

"DIAL NAME"*

"DELETE NAME"

"DELETE DIRECTORY"

"PLAY DIRECTORY"

"STORE NAME"

"REDIAL"*

"ACCEPT CALLS"

"REJECT CALLS"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Phone functionsDial numberPhone numbers can be dialled after givingthe name tag voice command.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NUMBER PLEASE""DIAL NUMBER"*2

"<phone number>"<phone number>"3CONTINUE?"

"DIALLING""DIAL"4

"<repeat last part of number>"CORRECTION"CONTINUE?"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

258

Voice control

Page 261: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Dial name Phone numbers can be dialled after givingthe name tag voice command.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NAME PLEASE""DIAL NAME"*2

"DIAL <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIALLING""YES"4

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

RedialThis function allows you to redial the lastdialled phone number.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"REDIAL""REDIAL"*2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIALLING""YES"3

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Mobile nameThis function allows you to access phonenumbers stored with a name tag in yourmobile phone.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"MOBILE NAME" "<phonedependent dialogue>""MOBILE NAME"*2

* Can be used as a shortcut.

259

Voice control

Page 262: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

DTMF (Tone dialling)This function transfers spoken numbersinto DTMF tones. For example, to make aremote enquiry to your home answeringmachine or to enter a PIN number etc.

Note: DTMF can only be used during anongoing call. Operate the VOICE button andwait for the system prompt.Can only be used with vehicles installed witha dedicated VOICE button.

System answerUser saysSteps

"NUMBER PLEASE"1

"<numbers 1 to 9, zero, hash, star>"2

Create a phonebookStore nameNew entries can be stored with the"STORE NAME" command. This featurecan be used to dial a number by calling upthe name instead of the full phone number.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"

"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3

"STORING NAME""<name>"4"<name> STORED""NUMBER PLEASE"

"<phone number>""<phone number>"5

"STORING NUMBER""STORE"6"<phone number>""NUMBER STORED"

Delete nameStored names can also be deleted fromthe directory.

260

Voice control

Page 263: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2

"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"<name> DELETED""YES"4

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Play directoryUse this function to let the system tell youall stored entries.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"PLAY DIRECTORY""PLAY DIRECTORY"2

Delete directoryThis function allows you to delete allentries in one go.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Main settingsReject callsCalls can be set to be automaticallyrejected using voice control.

261

Voice control

Page 264: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"REJECT CALLS""REJECT CALLS"2

"ACCEPT CALLS""ACCEPT CALLS"*

* use this command to turn the reject mode off

CLIMATE CONTROLCOMMANDSClimateThe climate voice commands supports thefunctionality of the fan speed, temperatureand mode settings. Not all functions areavailable on all vehicles.

OverviewThe overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"CLIMATE"

"HELP"

"FAN"*

"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON"*

"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"*

"TEMPERATURE"*

"AUTO MODE"*

* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the "FAN"shortcut is not available.

FanThis function allows you to adjust the fanspeed.

262

Voice control

Page 265: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

System answerUser saysSteps

"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"FAN SPEED PLEASE""‘FAN"*2

"FAN MINIMUM""MINIMUM"

3 "FAN <number>""<a number between 1 and 7>"

"FAN MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"

* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the "FAN"shortcut is not available.

Defrosting/Demisting

System answerUser saysSteps

"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING ON""DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING

ON"*

2"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING

OFF""DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING

OFF"*

* Can be used as a shortcut.

TemperatureThis function allows you to adjust thetemperature.

System answerUser saysSteps

"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"TEMPERATURE PLEASE""TEMPERATURE"*2

"TEMPERATURE MINIMUM""MINIMUM"

3"TEMPERATURE <number>"

"<a number between 15 and 29 °Cwith 0.5 increments>" or "<a

number between 59 and 84 °F>"

263

Voice control

Page 266: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

System answerUser saysSteps

"TEMPERATURE MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Auto mode

System answerUser saysSteps

"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"AUTO MODE""AUTO MODE"*2

* Can be used as a shortcut. Can be deactivated by selecting a different temperature orfan speed.

264

Voice control

Page 267: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTIONSTake care when handling externaldevices with exposed electricalconnectors (such as the USB plug).

Always replace the protective cap/shieldwhen possible. There may be a risk ofelectrostatic discharge causing damageto the device.

Do not touch or handle the USBsocket in the vehicle. Cover the socketwhen not in use.Only use USB Mass-Storage devicecompliant devices.Always switch your audio unit to adifferent source (for example theradio) before unplugging the USB

device.Do not install or connect USB hubs orsplitters.

Note: The system is only designed torecognize and read suitable audio files froma USB device that conforms to the USBMass-Storage device class or an iPod. Notall available USB devices can be guaranteedto function with the system.Note: It is possible to connect compatibledevices with a trailing USB lead as well asthose that plug into the vehicle USB socketdirectly (for example USB memory sticksand pen drives).Note: Some USB devices with a higherpower consumption may not be compatible(for example some larger hard drives).Note: Access time to read the files on theexternal device will vary depending uponfactors such as the file structure, size anddevice content.

The system supports a range of externaldevices, to fully integrate with your audiounit via the USB and auxiliary inputsockets. Once connected, control of theexternal device is possible via the audiounit.A list of typical compatible devices areshown below:• USB memory sticks• USB portable hard drives• Some MP3 players with USB

connection• iPod media players (refer to

www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for latestcompatibility list).

The system is USB 2.0 full speedcompatible, USB 1.1 host compliant andsupports FAT 16/32 file systems.

Information on audio filestructures for external devicesUSBCreate only a single partition on the USBdevice.If playlists are created, they must containcorrect file paths referenced to the USBdevice. It is recommended to create theplaylist after the audio files have beentransferred to the USB device.Playlists must be created in .m3u format.Audio files must be in .mp3 format.Do not exceed the following limits:• 1000 items per folder (files, folders and

playlists)• 5000 folders per USB device (including

playlists)• 8 subfolder levels.

265

Connectivity

Page 268: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

To enable voice control for customplaylists and folders, follow the procedurebelow:• Create folders named with the

structure "Ford<*>" where <*> is anumber 1-10. For example "Ford3"without an extension.

• Create playlists named with thestructure "Ford<*>.m3u" where <*>is a number 1-10. For example"Ford5.m3u" without any spacebetween "Ford" and the number.

Thereafter, custom folders and playlistswill be selectable with voice control. SeeAudio unit commands (page 250).

iPodTo enable voice control for customplaylists, create playlists named with thestructure "Ford<*>" where <*> is anumber 1-10. For example "Ford7" withoutany space between "Ford" and thenumber.Thereafter, playlists will be selectable withvoice control. See Audio unit commands(page 250).

CONNECTING AN EXTERNALDEVICE

WARNINGMake sure the external device issecurely mounted within the vehicle,and that trailing connections do not

obstruct any of the driving controls.

External devices may be connected usingthe auxiliary input socket and the USB port.See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket(page 113). See USB port (page 113).

ConnectionPlug in the device, and if necessary secureit to prevent movement within the vehicle.

Connecting an iPodFor optimum convenience and audioquality, we recommend that you purchasea dedicated single connection leadavailable from your dealer.Alternatively, it is possible to connect youriPod using the standard iPod USB cableand a separate 3.5mm audio jack lead. Ifusing this method preset the iPod volumeto maximum and turn off any equalizersettings before making the connections:• Connect the headphone output of the

iPod to the AUX IN socket.• Connect the USB cable from the iPod

to the vehicle USB socket.

CONNECTING AN EXTERNALDEVICE - VEHICLES WITH:BLUETOOTHConnecting a Bluetooth audiodevice

CAUTIONAs various standards exist,manufacturers are able to implementa variety of profiles in their Bluetooth

devices. Because of this, an incompatibilitycan occur between the Bluetooth deviceand the system, which in some cases maylimit system functionality. To avoid thissituation, only recommended devicesshould be used.

Please visit the websitewww.ford-mobile-connectivity.comfor full details.

266

Connectivity

Page 269: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Bonding the deviceTo connect the device to the system followthe same procedure as for Bluetooth handsfree phones. See Bluetooth setup (page245).

Operating the deviceNote: The seek buttons and file informationwill only work on certain phones anddevices.Select Bluetooth audio as the activesource.1. Select AUX.2. Press the up and down arrow buttons

to select the desired function.3. Press the OK button.Tracks can be accessed by skippingforwards and backwards using the steeringwheel controls, or directly from the audiounit controls.

Audio controlPress the seek up and down keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the seek keys to enable fastrewind/fast forward through track content.Press the INFO button or function button4 to display the following:• Title.• Artist.• Album.• File name.

USING A USB DEVICEVarious icons are used to identify types ofaudio file, folders etc.

E100029

USB device is the active source

E100022

Folder

E100023

Playlist

E100024

Album

E100025

Artist

E100026

Filename

E100027

Track title

E100028

Information not available

OperationSelect the USB device as the audio sourceby repeatedly pressing the AUX buttonuntil the USB screen appears in the display.After first connecting the USB device, thefirst track within the first folder will startto play automatically. Subsequently,following audio source switching, theposition of playback on the USB device isremembered.To browse the device contents, press theup/down arrow key or the OK button once.

267

Connectivity

Page 270: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of

the display shows the current positionof the folder view.

• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example afolder named after an album, withindividual album tracks within thatfolder).

• "<" before the list indicates that afurther level up is readable.

• Icons to the left of track/folder textindicate the type of file/folder. Referto the list for an explanation of theseicons.

To navigate the USB device contents, usethe up/down arrow keys to scroll throughlists, and the left/right keys to move up ordown within the folder hierarchy. Once yourdesired track, playlist or folder ishighlighted, press the OK button to selectplayback.Note: If you wish to jump to the top levelof the USB device contents, press and holdthe left arrow key.

Audio controlPress the seek up and down keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the seek keys to enable fastrewind/fast forward through track content.Use the function buttons to enable shuffle,repeat and scan with respect to the wholedevice, folders and playlists.Press the INFO button or function button4 to display the following:• title• artist• album

• folder name• file name.

USING AN IPODVarious icons are used to identify types ofaudio file, folders etc.

E100030

iPod is the active source

E100031

iPod playlist

E100032

iPod artist

E100033

iPod album

E100034

iPod genre

E100035

iPod song

E100036

iPod generic category

E100037

iPod generic media file

OperationConnect the iPod. See Connecting anexternal device (page 266).Select the iPod as the audio source byrepeatedly pressing the AUX button untilthe iPod screen appears in the display.

268

Connectivity

Page 271: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

The iPod menu list for browsing contentswill be available through the radio display.Navigation of the contents follows thesame principles as for iPod standalone use(for example search by artist, title, etc.).To browse the iPod contents, press theup/down arrow key or the OK button once.The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of

the display shows the current positionof the list view.

• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example allalbums by a particular artist).

• "<" before the list indicates that afurther level up is readable.

• An icon on the left side indicates thetype of the currently displayed list (forexample list of albums). Refer to thelist for an explanation of these icons.

To navigate the iPod contents, use theup/down arrow keys to scroll through lists,and the left/right keys to move up or downwithin the hierarchy. Once your desiredtrack, playlist, album, artist or genre ishighlighted, press the OK button to selectplayback.Note: If you wish to jump to the top levelof the iPod contents, press and hold the leftarrow key.

Audio controlPress the seek up and down keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the seek keys to enable fastrewind/fast forward through track content.Use the function buttons to enable shuffleand repeat with respect to playlists.Press function button 3 to scan the wholedevice or a playlist if it is in operation.

Press the INFO button or function button4 to display the following:• title• artist• album.

269

Connectivity

Page 272: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

GENERAL INFORMATIONPress the relevant button on the unit bezelto access the system functions. This willtake you into the selected mode.

One hour modeTo conserve battery power, the system canbe operated in one hour mode. If theignition is off, press the ON/OFF button toswitch the system on. The system willautomatically switch off after one hour.

System notesWARNINGS

The front glass on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hardobject. If the glass breaks, do not

touch the liquid crystalline material. In caseof contact with the skin, wash immediatelywith soap and water.

The unit is a highgrade laser productwhich uses an invisible laser beam.If this is handled incorrectly it can

emit dangerous rays. Do not attempt tolook through any openings in the unit.

CAUTIONSIrregular shaped CDs and CDs with ascratch protection film or selfadhesive labels attached should not

be used. Warranty claims, where this typeof disc is found to be inside an audio unitreturned for repair, will not be accepted.

Do not clean the unit with solvents oraerosol cleaning agents. Use only adamp cloth.Do not insert foreign objects into anyof the unit disc drives or media cardslots.Do not insert more than one disc intothe unit disc drive.

CAUTIONSUse only 12 cm (4.7 inches) discs or 8cm (3.1 inches) discs with a suitableadaptor.Do not attempt to open the unit. If theunit malfunctions consult your dealer.Improper use of settings andconnections, other than thoseexplained in this handbook, can

damage the unit.Do not turn the ignition key or attemptto start the engine while the softwareis updating.

The system is recommended for use whenthe ignition key is turned to the accessoryposition or when the engine is running. Ifthe system is used extensively when theengine is not running, care needs to betaken to avoid draining the battery.

ROAD SAFETY

WARNINGSThe system provides you withinformation designed to help youreach your destination quickly and

safely.For reasons of safety, the drivershould only program the systemwhen the vehicle is stationary.The system provides no assistancewith respect to stop signs, trafficlights, areas under construction or

other important safety information.Do not use the system until you havefamiliarised yourself with itsoperation.Only view the system display whendriving conditions permit.

270

Navigation introduction

Page 273: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Safety informationRead and follow all stated safetyprecautions. Failure to do so may increaseyour risk of collision and personal injury.Ford Motor Company shall not be liablefor any damages of any type arising fromfailure to follow these guidelines.If detailed viewing of route instructions isnecessary, pull off the road when it is safeto do so and park your vehicle.Do not use the navigation system to locateemergency services.To use the system as effectively and safelyas possible, always use the latestnavigation information. Your dealer will beable to assist with this.

271

Navigation introduction

Page 274: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E104157 A

1 2 3 4

Descriptions for function buttons1-4

A

Function buttons 1 to 4 are contextdependent, and change according to thecurrent unit mode. Descriptions for thefunctions are shown at the bottom of thescreen display.

272

Navigation unit overview

Page 275: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Vehicles with CD-SD navigation system

A B E FD

G

H

K

I

J

Q

R

T

U

V

S

P O MN L

C

E129241

CD eject.ANavigation arrows.BCD aperture.COK.DInformation.EMap select. See Route displays (page 284).FMenu select. See System settings (page 280).GTelephone keypad and station presets. See Audio unit operation (page 235).See Audio unit menus (page 238). See Telephone (page 245).

H

Clock. See System settings (page 280).ITraffic announcement. See Traffic Message Channel (page 285).JFunction 4.K

273

Navigation unit overview

Page 276: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Function 3.LSeek up. CD track selection. See Station tuning control (page 235). See Trackselection (page 240).

M

On/off and volume control. See On/off control (page 235).NSeek down. CD track selection. See Station tuning control (page 235). SeeTrack selection (page 240).

O

Function 2.PFunction 1.QPhone select. See Telephone (page 245).RAuxiliary select. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 243).SRadio select. See Audio unit operation (page 235). See Audio unit menus(page 238).

T

CD select. See Compact disc player (page 240).UNavigation select. See System settings (page 280).V

274

Navigation unit overview

Page 277: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Vehicles with Sony CD-SD navigation system

A CB FE

Y

I

G

H

J

L

KT

U

W

X

V

QS R N MOP

D

E129242

On/off control. See On/off control (page 235).ANavigation select. See System settings (page 280).BTelephone keypad and station presets. See Audio unit operation (page 235).See Audio unit menus (page 238). See Telephone (page 245).

C

CD aperture.DNavigation arrows.EMap select. See Route displays (page 284).FCD eject.GInformation.HClock. See System settings (page 280).ISeek up. CD track selection. end call. See Station tuning control (page 235).See Track selection (page 240). See Using the telephone (page 246).

J

275

Navigation unit overview

Page 278: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Home select. See System settings (page 280).KTraffic announcement. See Traffic Message Channel (page 285).LFunction 4.MSound select. See Sound button (page 235).NFunction 3.OOK.PFunction 2.QMenu select. See System settings (page 280).RFunction 1.SPhone select. See Telephone (page 245).TAuxiliary select. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 243).USeek down. CD track selection. accept call. See Station tuning control (page235). See Track selection (page 240). See Using the telephone (page 246).

V

Radio select. See Audio unit operation (page 235). See Audio unit menus(page 238).

W

CD select. See Compact disc player (page 240).XVolume control.Y

LOADING THE NAVIGATIONDATALoading the navigation data

E129900

1. Load the navigation SD card into theaperture.

2. Press the NAV button. The road safetywarning will be shown in the display.

3. Use the up and down arrow buttons toselect the required feature.

4. Press the OK button to confirm yourselection.

For map updates and system upgradesplease refer to your dealer.

276

Navigation unit overview

Page 279: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Vehicles with mobile navigationsystem

CAUTIONUsing the system with the engine offwill drain the battery.

Note: You will be charged when sendingand receiving text messages.Note: Refer to your phone handbook for allphone functions and operation.Note: Keep the activation code (printed onthe installation guide) in a safe place.Note: Retain the activation text messagein your mobile phone inbox.

Compatibility of phones

CAUTIONAs no common agreement exists,mobile phone manufacturers are ableto implement a variety of profiles in

their Bluetooth devices. Because of this,an incompatibility can occur between thephone and hands-free system, which insome cases may significantly degrade thesystem performance. To avoid thissituation, only recommended phonesshould be used.

Please visit the websitewww.ford-mobile-connectivity.com forfull details.

Installing the micro SD card

1

2

E114212

1. Remove the micro SD card from theadaptor.

2. Insert the micro SD card into the mobilephone.

Activating the mobile phonenavigation systemNote: The radio must be switched on beforeconnecting the mobile phone to the in-carGPS receiver.Note: The Ford Mobile Navigation must beinstalled and activated on your mobilephone.Note: It is possible to activate up to amaximum of three phones.Note: Detailed instructions are availableon the micro SD card and atwww.ford-mobile-connectivity.com.To connect the device to the system followthe same procedure as for Bluetooth handsfree phones. See Bluetooth setup (page245).1. Switch the radio on.

277

Navigation Quick start

Page 280: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E114213

2. Switch your mobile phone on and startthe "Ford Mobile Navigation".

3. Choose "Select Destination".4. Choose "Enter Address".5. Change route options if necessary and

start the route guidance.6. The vehicle display will show the turn

information. Voice instructions areheard via the vehicle speakers.

Note: Your mobile phone will display yourcurrent position.7. You are able to exit the application and

continue your route guidance afterrestarting the application.

Vehicles with CD-SD navigationsystem or Sony CD-SD navigationsystemThe system has a large range of features,yet is easy and intuitive to use. Routeguidance is shown on the display screen.The screen provides full information foroperating the system through the use ofmenus, text screens and map displays.Screen selections are made by scrollingthrough the menus using the up, down, leftand right arrow buttons and pressing theOK button to activate the desired setting.

Basic operation1. Press either the NAV or MENU button

to enter the menu structure.2. Use the up, down, left and right arrow

buttons and scroll through the variousselection lists.

3. Press the OK button to activate yourselection.

Selection listsVarious screens are presented which offera selection list of available options.1. Select the option you require, or if it is

not shown on the screen use the upand down arrow buttons to view theremainder of the selection list.

2. Press the OK button to confirm yourselection.

Alphanumeric keypad entryWhen it is necessary to enter an address,a keypad will appear prompting you toenter a postcode, city, or street.1. Use the up, down, left and right arrow

buttons to select the letter or numberthat you require.

Note: As you spell the entry the results willappear in the display.Note: The system will limit your entries toonly those characters which spell a validentry.2. Press the OK button to activate your

selection.

Route setting exampleNavigation main screen• To select the navigation system, press

the NAV button. The road safetycaution will be displayed. To use thesystem, read the caution and press theOK button.

Destination input screen• Use the up and down arrow buttons

and scroll to Destination input.• Press the OK button to activate your

selection.Note: A list with several options is shown.

278

Navigation Quick start

Page 281: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

• Starting from the top, select thecountry followed by either thepostcode if available or city and streetname.

• Use the alphanumeric keypad andselection lists to select your addressdetails.

• Once sufficient information has beenentered, scroll to Start guidance andpress the OK button to activate yourselection.

Note: If you only need to navigate to a citycentre for example, full address details arenot required.• The route is now calculated and the

screen returns to the main navigationscreen with instructions on how toproceed.

• Follow the screen information andvoice prompts to reach yourdestination.

279

Navigation Quick start

Page 282: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Most of the important settings for yournavigation unit can be accessed via theMENU or NAV button. The followingsection describes the various options andhow to use them.For menu structures: See InformationDisplays (page 75).

Menu structure - Information andentertainment display - Vehicleswith navigation systemRouteThis feature allows you to customise theroute to your specific journey requirements(for example continue route guidance,block specific sections of your route orselect specific sections of a route).

Destination inputThis feature allows you to enter yourdestination details (for example enter citynames, enter street names or pick a placefrom a map).

TrafficThis feature allows you to customise howyou receive traffic information (forexample review and sort traffic messages,review your route or block parts of yourroute).

Home addressThis feature allows you to start the routeguidance to your home address or changethe details of your home address.Note: On Vehicles with a Sony CD-SDnavigation system, press the HOME buttonand the system will automatically startroute guidance to the listed home address.

Last destinationsThis feature allows quick access to ahistory of previous destinations entered inthe system. A detailed display will showthe complete stored information includingan overview map. Select the requiredrepeat destination from the list.

FavouritesThis feature allows you to customize apersonal destination address book andassign user defined names to addressesand locations. A detailed display will showthe complete stored information includingan overview map. Select the requiredrepeat destination from the list.

Points of interestThis feature allows you to customise theroute to your specific journey requirements(for example select a museum on route ora specific point of interest near yourdestination).

Tour planningThis feature allows you to enter a numberof different destinations and select theorder in which you wish to visit them. Youcan also modify an existing tour or recall aprevious tour. The system willautomatically calculate and display yourchosen journey.

Store positionThis feature allows you to store and nameyour current position.

Route optionsThis feature allows you to customise theroute to your specific journey requirements(for example select the fastest or mosteconomical route or select a route that willavoid tunnels, seasonal roads and tollroads).

280

System settings

Page 283: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Special functionsThis feature allows you to select GPS andsystem information or a demonstration ofthe system functionality.

Map displayThis feature allows you to change the waythe map screen is displayed (for exampleclean 2D and clean 3D view) and tocustomise display information for yourjourney (for example time to arrival andlane guidance).

Assistance optionsThis feature allows you to customisedisplay information for your journey (forexample signs, lanes and speed limits).

Personal dataThis feature allows you to edit and deletepersonal data (for example your homeaddress).

Reset all settingsThis feature allows you to reset thenavigation settings.

Menu structure - Information andentertainment display - AllvehiclesAudio settingsAdaptive volumeThis feature allows you to adjust thevolume level to compensate for engine androad speed noise. You can turn this on andoff.

SoundThis feature allows you to adjust the soundsettings (for example bass and treble.

Nav audio mixingThis feature allows you to adjust thevolume mix between the navigation voiceoutput and audio source.

DSP settingsThis feature allows you to customisespeaker output relevant to seat positions.

DSP equaliserThis feature allows you to select the musiccategory that most suits your listeningpreference. The audio output will changeto enhance the particular style of musicchosen.

NewsThis feature allows you to receive newsbulletins from stations on the FMwaveband or radio data system (RDS) andenhanced other network (EON) linkedstations, in the same way as trafficinformation is provided. You can turn thison and off.

Alternative frequenciesThis feature will search for and switch tothe strongest station signal when movingfrom one transmission area to another.

RDS regionalThis feature controls the behaviour of AFswitching between regionally relatednetworks of a parent broadcaster.

DAB service linkThis feature allows you to select stationsthat are broadcast on the DAB channels.

BluetoothThis feature allows you to switchBluetooth on or off.

281

System settings

Page 284: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Clock settingsSet timeThis feature allows you to manually adjustthe time.

Set dateThis feature allows you to manually adjustthe date, month and year.

GPS timeThis feature allows you to, if in a suitablecoverage area, automatically adjust thedate and time using GPS.

Set time zoneThis feature allows you select a specifictime zone.

SummertimeThis feature allows you set the system toadjust for seasonal time differences.Note: GPS time must be selected.

24-hour modeThis feature allows you to adjust thesystem between 12 and 24-hour mode.

282

System settings

Page 285: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

ROUTE OPTIONS MENUYou can set a number of options whichalter the way a route is planned.Using the up, down, left and right arrowbuttons, you can select from the list whichroad features are to be avoided or includedin the route by turning the feature on or off.

RouteEcoThis option will prioritise the mosteconomical route to the destination.

FastThis option will prioritise the fastest routeto the destination.

ShortThis option will prioritise the shortest routeto the destination..

Always askUse this feature to make sure that you arealways given the choice of route typeselection for your journey.

DriverLeisurelyThis option will prioritise the route for aleisurely driver to the destination.

NormalThis option will prioritise the route for anormal driver to the destination.

FastThis option will prioritise the route for afast driver to the destination.

Eco settingsTrailerUse this feature to change the economysettings of your journey relating to whetheror not you are towing a trailer and if so thesize of trailer being towed.

Roof boxUse this feature to change the economysettings of your journey relating to the useof a roof box.

DynamicWhen switched on, and if the unit isreceiving a valid traffic message channel(TMC) signal, the route will beautomatically updated to take intoaccount real time traffic incidents orcongestion.Note: This feature can be useful in avoidingdelays or hold ups on journeys.

MotorwayWhen switched on the system will look formotorways on your route andautomatically update your route distanceand timings.Note: This feature can be useful in avoidingdelays or hold ups on journeys.

Ferry/motorailWhen switched on the system will look forferry crossings and motorail facilities onyour route and automatically update yourroute distance and timings.

TollWhen switched on the system will look fortoll roads on your route and automaticallyupdate your route distance and timings.

283

Navigation system

Page 286: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Seasonal roadsWhen switched on the system will look forseasonal roads on your route andautomatically update your route distanceand timings.Note: This feature can be useful in avoidingdelays or hold ups on journeys.

Toll stickerWhen switched on the system willautomatically select toll roads and updateyour route distance and timings.

ROUTE DISPLAYSMap displayPress the MAP button for a map view.This view will show your current locationwith your vehicle in the centre shown asan arrow surrounded by a circle. The arrowwill face in the direction of travel.The information on the top line gives thename of the current road, or the next roadto take if a turn is approaching.You can change the way the map isdisplayed by altering the zoom andorientation settings. Press the relevantfunction buttons to change the map scaleand using the left and right arrow buttonszoom in or out. The current map scale isshown on the display.Map scale settings may be set between50 metres to 500 kilometres or 0.05 milesto 500 miles, with an auto setting to thefar left. The auto setting continuouslychanges the map scale according to theroad type being driven.

Junction zoomThis feature will automatically increasethe zoom on the map display at timeswhen you are required to make a turn, orperform more complex manoeuvres.Shortly after the zoom scale will return tothe previous level.Select AUTO to activate junction zoom.

Navigation displayAfter commencing a navigation route, thedefault screen is the main navigationscreen:Once an active route is underway, guidancewill be given by on-screen information andvoice prompts. Whichever audio sourceyou wish to leave the unit in, basic turn byturn and distance information will remainon the screen in the form of a graphic inset.You do not need to leave the unit on themain navigation screen when you arenavigating a route. Slightly more detailedinformation on your route may be availablevia the main navigation screen if required.

WARNINGDo not rely on the screen promptswhen navigating. Always listen to thenavigation voice and take care not

be distracted from the road ahead.

284

Navigation system

Page 287: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONTraffic message channel (TMC) stationsare broadcast on the FM waveband. TMCis a feature that receives traffic alertswhich can be used to plan alternativeroutes and avoid hold ups.

USING TMCPress the TA or TRAFFIC button to showthe traffic menu page.

Traffic announcementTraffic announcement (TA) can be turnedon or off via this menu. If switched on a TAindicator is shown in the informationborder of the status bar.Stations which broadcast on the FMwaveband and carry traffic programme(TP) information are identified by TPshown in the screen display. With TAswitched on the unit will respond to theseannouncements and interrupt musicplayback. After the announcement hasended music playback will resume.

Ending traffic announcementsThe unit will return to normal operation atthe end of each traffic announcement. Toend the announcement prematurely, pressthe TA, TRAFFIC, RADIO or CD buttonduring the announcement.

Using TMC messagesSelect the required item to display a list ofTMC messages. See GeneralInformation (page 75). This is only anoverview display which gives very basicinformation. Select the message yourequire further information on and anotherscreen will be displayed giving full messagedetails on incident location etc.

You may either select a view which showsmessages only affecting your programmedroute, or a view which shows all messagesreceived. Press function button 1 to changethe view.

285

Traffic Message Channel

Page 288: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

The road network is constantly changingdue to new roads, changes in roadclassification, etc. Therefore, it is notalways possible to exactly match the mapdata in the system to the current roadnetwork.Map information is regularly updated, butall areas are not necessarily covered to thesame level of detail. Some roads, inparticular private roads, may not beincluded on the database. To help withaccuracy, always use the latest versionnavigation disc. Your dealer will be able toprovide this.

286

Map updates

Page 289: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

TYPE APPROVALSFCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICEThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.FCC ID: WJLRX-42IC: 7847A-RX42Changes or modifications to your devicenot expressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance can void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.

RX-42 - declaration of conformityWe, the party responsible for compliance,declare under our sole responsibility thatthe Handset Integration product RX-42 isin conformity with the provisions of thefollowing Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. Acopy of the Declaration of Conformity canbe found at:

www.novero.com/declaration_of_conformityThe Bluetooth word mark and logos areowned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and anyuse of such marks by Ford Motor Companyis under license. Other trademarks andtrade names are those of their respectiveowners.

TYPE APPROVALSiPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.

TYPE APPROVALS

E114214

© 2008 NAVTEQ B.V. All rights reserved.

287

Appendices

Page 290: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

E114220

TYPE APPROVALS

E97713

E97714

SD Logo is a trademark.

TYPE APPROVALSLaser sensor

E132582

288

Appendices

Page 291: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

WARNINGSInvisible laser radiation. Do not viewdirectly with optical instruments(magnifiers). Class 1M laser product.

WARNINGSIEC 60825-1: 1993 + A2:2001.Complies with FDA performancestandards for laser products except

for deviation pursuant to Laser Notice No.50, dated July 26th, 2001.

SpecificationItem

45mWMax average power

33nsPulse duration

905nmWavelength

TYPE APPROVALSEU DeclarationHereby, Valeo declares that this shortrange device is in compliance with theessential requirements and other relevantprovisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Certificate for United ArabEmirates

E125209

ELECTROMAGNETICCOMPATIBILITY

WARNINGSYour vehicle has been tested andcertified to legislations relating toelectromagnetic compatibility

(72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 orother applicable local requirements). It isyour responsibility to ensure that anyequipment you have fitted complies withapplicable local legislations. Have anyequipment fitted by properly trainedtechnicians.

The RF (radio frequency) transmitterequipment (e.g. cellular telephones,amateur radio transmitters etc.) may

only be fitted to your vehicle if they complywith the parameters shown in the tablebelow. There are no special provisions orconditions for installations or use.

Do not mount any transceiver,microphones, speakers, or any otheritem in the deployment path of the

airbag system.Do not fasten antenna cables tooriginal vehicle wiring, fuel pipes andbrake pipes.

289

Appendices

Page 292: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

WARNINGSKeep antenna and power cables atleast 10 centimetres (4 inches) from

WARNINGSany electronic modules and airbags.

E85998

1 2 3 4

Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (PeakRMS)

Frequency BandMHz

3, 450 W1 – 30

1, 2, 350 W30 – 54

1, 2, 350 W68 – 87.5

1, 2, 350 W142 – 176

1, 2, 350 W380 – 512

1, 2, 310 W806 – 940

1, 2, 310 W1200 – 1400

1, 2, 310 W1710 – 1885

1, 2, 310 W1885 – 2025

Note: After the installation of RFtransmitters, check for disturbances fromand to all electrical equipment in thevehicle, both in the standby and transmitmodes.

Check all electrical equipment:• with the ignition ON• with the engine running• during a road test at various speeds.

290

Appendices

Page 293: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Check that electromagnetic fieldsgenerated inside the vehicle cabin by thetransmitter installed do not exceedapplicable human exposure requirements.

291

Appendices

Page 294: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

292

Page 295: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

AA/C

See: Climate Control..........................................94About This Manual...........................................7ABS

See: Brakes............................................................132ABS driving hints

See: Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes.................................................................132

ACCSee: Adaptive cruise control (ACC)............148

AccessoriesSee: Parts and Accessories.................................7See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............150

Active City Stop.............................................162Principle of Operation.......................................162

Active Park Assist.........................................143Principle of Operation.......................................143

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)................148Principle of Operation.......................................148

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............150

Adjusting the Headlamps - VehiclesWith: Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps.....................................................51

Adjusting the Steering Wheel.....................41Air Conditioning

See: Climate Control..........................................94Air Vents............................................................94

Centre air vents.....................................................94Side air vent...........................................................95

Alarm..................................................................39Principle of Operation........................................39

Alternative frequencies.............................238Appendices....................................................287Arming the alarm...........................................40Arming the engine immobiliser................38At a Glance........................................................10

Front exterior overview.......................................10Instrument panel overview................................12Rear exterior overview.........................................15Vehicle interior overview......................................11

Audible Warnings and Indicators..............73Automatic transmission.....................................73Door open................................................................74Frost...........................................................................73Key outside car......................................................73Lights on...................................................................74Low fuel....................................................................74Seat belt reminder...............................................74Switching the chimes on and off....................73

Audio Control....................................................41Type 1.........................................................................41Type 2.......................................................................42

Audio introduction.......................................227Audio system security................................234Audio troubleshooting...............................244Audio unit commands...............................250

Auxiliary input.....................................................254CD Player..............................................................250External devices - iPod....................................256External devices - USB....................................254Radio........................................................................251

Audio unit menus........................................238Audio unit operation...................................235Audio unit overview....................................228Auto-Dimming Mirror...................................66Autolamps........................................................48Automatic Climate Control........................97

Air distribution.......................................................99Blower......................................................................98Cooling the interior quickly...............................99Mono mode............................................................98Recirculated air.....................................................99Setting the temperature...................................98Switching off the automatic climate

control.................................................................99Switching the air conditioning on and

off..........................................................................99To switch mono mode back on......................98To switch mono mode off................................98Windscreen defrosting and demisting........99

Automatic Main Beam Control.................48Activating the system.........................................49Manually overriding the system.....................50Setting the system sensitivity.........................49

293

Index

Page 296: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Automatic Transmission............................129Emergency park position release

lever......................................................................131Hints on driving with an automatic

transmission....................................................130Selector lever positions....................................129Sport mode and manual shifting.................130

Automatic volume control.......................238Autostore control.........................................236Autowipers........................................................43Auxiliary Heater.............................................102

Diesel auxiliary heater (depending oncountry)............................................................104

Fuel operated heater (depending oncountry)............................................................104

Parking heater......................................................102Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket................113Auxiliary Power Points..................................111

BBattery connection points........................207Blind Spot Monitor........................................66

Blind spot information system (BLIS).........66Detection errors....................................................68System detection and alerts............................67Turning the system on and off.........................67Using the system.................................................66

Bluetooth setup...........................................245Handling of phones..........................................245Requirements for Bluetooth

connection.......................................................245Bonnet Lock

See: Opening and Closing the Bonnet.......190Booster cables

See: Jump-Starting the Vehicle...................206Booster Seats..................................................20

Booster cushion (Group 3)...............................20Booster seat (Group 2)......................................20

Brake and Clutch Fluid Check................200Brakes................................................................132

Principle of Operation.......................................132Bulb changing

See: Changing a Bulb..........................................55Bulb Specification Chart.............................62

CCapacities and Specifications................223

Technical Specifications.................................223Cargo Nets......................................................165

Cargo net...............................................................166Luggage retention net.......................................165

Car WashSee: Cleaning the Exterior..............................204

Catalytic Converter......................................124Driving with a catalytic converter.................124

Changing a Bulb.............................................55Approach lamp......................................................57Central high mounted brake lamp.................61Front fog lamps....................................................58Headlamp...............................................................55Interior lamps.........................................................61Luggage compartment lamp, footwell lamp

and tailgate lamp.............................................61Number plate lamp..............................................61Rear lamps - 4 door............................................59Rear lamps - 5 door............................................58Side repeater..........................................................57

Changing a Fuse............................................179Changing a Road Wheel...........................208

Assembling the wheel brace.........................210Installing a road wheel......................................212Jacking and lifting points................................209Locking wheel nuts...........................................208Removing a road wheel.....................................211Removing the wheel trim..................................211Vehicle jack..........................................................208Vehicles with a spare wheel.........................208

Changing the remote controlbattery.............................................................29Remote control with a folding key

blade....................................................................29Remote control without a folding key

blade....................................................................30Changing the Vehicle Battery..................207Changing the Wiper Blades.......................45

Rear window wiper blade.................................46Windscreen wiper blades.................................45

Checking the Wiper Blades........................45Childminder Mirror.........................................112Child Safety........................................................17

294

Index

Page 297: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Child Safety Locks..........................................22Electric child safety locks..................................22Manual child safety locks..................................22

Child Seat Positioning...................................18Child Seats.........................................................17

Child restraints for different massgroups...................................................................17

Cigar Lighter......................................................111Cleaning the Exterior..................................204

Body paintwork preservation.......................204Cleaning the chrome trim..............................204Cleaning the headlamps................................204Cleaning the rear window..............................204

Cleaning the Interior...................................204Instrument cluster screens, LCD screens,

radio screens..................................................205Rear windows.....................................................205Seat belts.............................................................204

Climate Control..............................................94Principle of Operation........................................94

Climate control commands....................262Climate..................................................................262

Clock....................................................................111Coded keys.......................................................38Cold Weather Precautions........................176Compact disc playback............................240Compact disc player..................................240Compact disc track scanning..................241

Type 1.......................................................................241Type 2 and 3..........................................................241

Connecting an external device...............266Connection..........................................................266

Connecting an external device - VehiclesWith: Bluetooth.........................................266Connecting a Bluetooth audio

device................................................................266Connectivity...................................................265

General Information.........................................265Convenience features...................................111Coolant Check

See: Engine Coolant Check............................199Cornering Lamps............................................52Cruise Control................................................146

Principle of Operation.......................................146Cruise control

See: Using Cruise Control................................146Cup Holders.....................................................112

Rear seat armrest................................................112

DDiesel Particulate Filter...............................118

Regeneration.........................................................118Digital signal processing (DSP).............238

Changing the DSP settings............................238DSP equaliser......................................................238DSP occupancy..................................................238

Direction Indicators........................................52Disabling the passenger airbag.................27

Disabling the passenger airbag......................28Enabling the passenger airbag.......................28Fitting the passenger airbag deactivation

switch...................................................................27Disarming the alarm.....................................40

Vehicles with keyless entry..............................40Vehicles without keyless entry.......................40

Disarming the engine immobiliser...........38Dog Guard.......................................................166

Installing behind the front seats..................166Installing behind the rear seats.....................167

DPFSee: Diesel Particulate Filter...........................118

Driver Alert......................................................154Principle of Operation.......................................154

Driving Hints....................................................176Driving Through Water................................176

Driving through water .......................................176

EEco Mode.........................................................122

Principle of Operation.......................................122Electric exterior mirrors................................65

Electric folding mirrors.......................................65Mirror tilting positions.........................................65

Electric sunroof.............................................100Opening and closing the sunroof..................101Opening and closing the sunroof

automatically...................................................101Sunroof anti-trap protection..........................101Sunroof relearning.............................................102Sunroof safety mode........................................102Tilting the sunroof...............................................101

Electromagnetic compatibility..............289Ending compact disc playback..............242Engine Block Heater.....................................119

295

Index

Page 298: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Engine Coolant Check................................199Checking the coolant level.............................199Topping up............................................................199

Engine immobiliser........................................38Principle of Operation........................................38

Engine Oil Check..........................................198Checking the oil level........................................199Topping up............................................................199

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16VTi-VCT (Sigma).........................................198

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi(DV) Diesel/2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel.............................................................198

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma).........................................................198

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4)..............................................................198

Exterior Mirrors................................................64Manual folding mirrors.......................................64

FFastening the seat belts..............................25Fast forward/reverse..................................240First Aid Kit.......................................................177Floor Mats.........................................................113Fog Lamps - Front

See: Front Fog Lamps........................................50Fog Lamps - Rear

See: Rear Fog Lamps.........................................50Forward alert function................................152

Adjusting the warning sensitivity..................152Switching the system on and off..................152

Front Fog Lamps............................................50Fuel and Refuelling......................................123

Technical Specifications...................................127Fuel Burning Heater

See: Auxiliary Heater.........................................102Fuel Consumption........................................127Fuel Consumption

See: Technical Specifications.........................127Fuel filler flap..................................................124

Refuelling with a fuel can................................126Fuel Quality - Diesel.....................................123

Long-term storage.............................................124Fuel Quality - E85.........................................123

Long-term storage..............................................123Fuel Quality - Petrol.....................................123

Fuse Box Locations......................................178Engine compartment fuse box......................178Load compartment fuse box.........................178Passenger compartment fuse box...............178

Fuses.................................................................178Fuse Specification Chart...........................180

Engine compartment fuse box.....................180Load compartment fuse box.........................185Passenger compartment fuse box..............183

GGauges...............................................................69

Engine coolant temperature gauge...............70Fuel gauge...............................................................70

GearboxSee: Transmission..............................................129

General Information on RadioFrequencies...................................................29

Glasses Holder................................................112Global Opening and Closing......................36

Global closing........................................................36Global opening......................................................36

HHandbrake

See: Parking Brake..............................................132Hazard Warning Flashers.............................51Headlamp adjustment

See: Adjusting the Headlamps - Vehicles With:Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps.........................................................51

Headlamp Levelling.......................................51Recommended headlamp levelling switch

positions..............................................................51Headlamp Washers......................................45Head Restraints............................................106

Adjusting the head restraint..........................106Removing the head restraint..........................107

Heated Seats..................................................110Heated Windows and Mirrors.................100

Heated exterior mirrors....................................100Heated windows................................................100

HeatingSee: Climate Control..........................................94

Hill launch assist (HLA)See: Using hill start assist...............................134

296

Index

Page 299: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Hill Start Assist..............................................134Principle of Operation.......................................134

Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes.............................................................132

HLASee: Hill Start Assist..........................................134See: Using hill start assist...............................134

IIgnition Switch................................................114Immobiliser

See: Engine immobiliser....................................38Important audio information...................227

Audio unit labels.................................................227Disc labels.............................................................227

Information Displays.....................................75General Information............................................75

Information Messages.................................83Active City Stop....................................................84Airbag.......................................................................84Alarm........................................................................84Automatic main beam control.......................84Battery and charging system...........................85Blind spot monitor...............................................85Child power lock...................................................85Climate control.....................................................85Cruise control and Adaptive cruise control

(ACC)...................................................................86Doors open.............................................................86Driver alert..............................................................86Engine immobiliser..............................................87Hill start assist.......................................................87Keyless entry..........................................................87Lane keeping aid..................................................88Lighting....................................................................88Maintenance..........................................................89Message indicator................................................83Occupant protection..........................................89Parking aid..............................................................89Parking brake.........................................................90Power steering......................................................90Stability control (ESP)......................................90Starting the engine.............................................90Start-stop................................................................91Transmission..........................................................92Tyre pressure monitoring system...................93

Instrument Cluster........................................69

Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................111Interior Lamps.................................................53

Ambient lighting...................................................53Interior lighting......................................................53

Introduction.........................................................7iPod connection

See: Connecting an external device...........266See: Connecting an external device - Vehicles

With: Bluetooth.............................................266iPod

See: Using an iPod............................................268ISOFIX Anchor Points....................................21

Attaching a child seat with top tethers.........21Top tether anchor points - 4 door

vehicles.................................................................21Top tether anchor points - all vehicles..........21

JJump starting

See: Jump-Starting the Vehicle...................206Jump-Starting the Vehicle.......................206

To connect the booster cables....................206To start the engine............................................207

KKeyless Entry....................................................34

Disabled keys.........................................................35General information............................................34Locking and unlocking the doors with the

key blade............................................................36Locking the vehicle..............................................34Passive key..............................................................34Unlocking the vehicle..........................................35

Keyless Starting.............................................116Failure to start.......................................................117Ignition on...............................................................117Starting a diesel engine.....................................117Starting with automatic transmission.........117Starting with manual transmission...............117Stopping the engine when the vehicle is

moving................................................................118Stopping the engine with the vehicle

stationary...........................................................118Keys and Remote Controls.........................29

297

Index

Page 300: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

LLane Departure Warning...........................156

Principle of Operation.......................................156Lane Keeping Aid..........................................158

Principle of Operation.......................................158Lighting Control...............................................47

Headlamp flasher.................................................47Home safe lighting..............................................48Lighting control positions..................................47Main and dipped beam......................................47Parking lamps........................................................47

Lighting...............................................................47Load Carriers

See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............168Load Carrying.................................................164

General Information..........................................164Loading the navigation data....................276

Loading the navigation data..........................276Locking and Unlocking.................................32

Double locking.......................................................32Locking.....................................................................32Locking and unlocking confirmation.............33Locking and unlocking the doors from

inside....................................................................33Locking the doors individually with the

key.........................................................................33Luggage compartment lid................................33Unlocking.................................................................32

Locks...................................................................32Luggage Anchor Points..............................164Luggage Covers.............................................164

MMaintenance..................................................190

General Information..........................................190Technical Specifications..................................201

Manual Climate Control..............................95Air conditioning.....................................................96Air distribution control.......................................95Blower......................................................................96Heating the interior quickly..............................96Recirculated air.....................................................96Ventilation..............................................................96

Manual Seats.................................................105Adjusting the angle of the seatback...........106Adjusting the height of the driver’s

seat.....................................................................106Adjusting the lumbar support.......................106Moving the seats backwards and

forwards............................................................105Manual Transmission..................................129

Selecting reverse gear.......................................129Map updates.................................................286Message Centre

See: Information Displays.................................75Mirrors

See: Heated Windows and Mirrors..............100See: Windows and Mirrors................................63

MP3 connectionSee: Connecting an external device...........266See: Connecting an external device - Vehicles

With: Bluetooth.............................................266MP3 display options....................................241

CD text display options....................................242MP3 file playback.........................................241

Playing a multi session disc............................241

NNavigation introduction.............................270

General Information.........................................270Navigation Quick start................................277

Vehicles with CD-SD navigation system orSony CD-SD navigation system..............278

Vehicles with mobile navigationsystem................................................................277

Navigation system.......................................283Navigation unit overview...........................272

Vehicles with CD-SD navigationsystem...............................................................273

Vehicles with Sony CD-SD navigationsystem...............................................................275

News broadcasts.........................................238

OOccupant protection.....................................24

Principle of Operation.........................................24Oil Check

See: Engine Oil Check.......................................198On/off control...............................................235

298

Index

Page 301: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Opening and Closing the Bonnet...........190Closing the bonnet..............................................191Opening the bonnet..........................................190

PParking Aids....................................................136

Principle of Operation.......................................136Parking Brake..................................................132Parts and Accessories.....................................7

Look for the Ford logo on the followingparts .......................................................................8

Now you can be sure that your Ford partsare Ford parts.......................................................7

Personalised Settings..................................82Chime deactivation.............................................83Language setting..................................................82Measure units........................................................83Temperature units...............................................83

Power Door LocksSee: Locking and Unlocking.............................32

Power Seats...................................................108Power Windows..............................................63

Anti-trap function................................................63Driver's door switches........................................63Global opening and closing.............................63Opening and closing the windows

automatically....................................................63Resetting the memory of the electric

windows.............................................................64Safety switch for rear windows......................63

Programming the remote control............29Programming a new remote control............29Reprogramming the unlocking

function...............................................................29

RRear Fog Lamps.............................................50Rear Seats.......................................................109

Folding the rear seatbacks forwards..........109Folding the seatbacks up.................................110Folding the seat cushions and the rear

seatbacks forwards......................................109Rear view camera........................................140

Principle of Operation......................................140

Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........44Intermittent wipe.................................................44Rear window washer..........................................45Reverse gear wipe................................................45

Refuelling - E85.............................................126Refuelling.........................................................126Regional mode (REG)................................239Remote control battery

See: Changing the remote controlbattery.................................................................29

Remote control programmingSee: Programming the remote control........29

Removing a Headlamp................................54Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............205Repeat compact disc tracks...................240

Type 1.....................................................................240Type 2 and 3........................................................240

Retractable tow ball....................................170Driving with a trailer............................................172Fault conditions...................................................172Maintenance.........................................................172Releasing the tow ball arm.............................170Swivelling the tow ball arm in........................172Swivelling the tow ball arm out......................171

Road Safety...................................................270Safety information..............................................271

Roadside Emergencies................................177Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................168

Installing the crossbars....................................168Roof rack...............................................................168

Route displays..............................................284Junction zoom....................................................284Map display.........................................................284Navigation display.............................................284

Route options menu...................................283Driver......................................................................283Dynamic................................................................283Eco settings.........................................................283Ferry/motorail.....................................................283Motorway..............................................................283Route......................................................................283Seasonal roads..................................................284Toll...........................................................................283Toll sticker............................................................284

Running-In.......................................................176Brakes and clutch...............................................176Engine......................................................................176Tyres.........................................................................176

299

Index

Page 302: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

SSafety Precautions.......................................123Satellite Navigation Unit Holder..............113

Adjusting the holder............................................113Seat belt height adjustment......................26Seat belt reminder.........................................26

Deactivating the seat belt reminder..............27Rear seat belt reminder......................................27

Seat beltsSee: Fastening the seat belts...........................25

Seats.................................................................105Security code.................................................234Shuffle/random...........................................240

Type 1.....................................................................240Type 2 and 3........................................................240

Sitting in the Correct Position..................105Snow Chains

See: Using Snow Chains...................................217Sound button................................................235Speed Control

See: Cruise Control............................................146Speed Limiter.................................................153

Principle of Operation.......................................153Stability Control............................................133

Principle of Operation.......................................133Starter Switch

See: Ignition Switch............................................114Starting a Diesel Engine..............................116

Cold or hot engine...............................................116Starting and Stopping the Engine...........114

General Information...........................................114Starting a Petrol Engine - E85..................115

Starting at low ambient temperatures...............................................................................116

Starting a Petrol Engine..............................115Cold or hot engine...............................................115Engine idle speed after starting.....................115Flooded engine.....................................................115

Start-Stop.......................................................120Principle of Operation.......................................120

Station preset buttons..............................236Station tuning control................................235

DAB service linking............................................235Manual tuning.....................................................235Scan tuning..........................................................235Seek tuning..........................................................235

Steering Wheel Lock....................................114Vehicles with keyless starting.........................114Vehicles without keyless starting..................114

Steering Wheel................................................41Sunroof

See: Electric sunroof.........................................100Switching Off the Engine............................119

Vehicles with a turbocharger..........................119Symbols Glossary.............................................7

Symbols in this handbook...................................7Symbols on your vehicle.......................................7

System settings...........................................280Audio settings......................................................281Clock settings......................................................282Menu structure - Information and

entertainment display - Allvehicles..............................................................281

Menu structure - Information andentertainment display - Vehicles withnavigation system........................................280

TTechnical Specifications

See: Capacities and Specifications............223Telephone commands...............................257

Create a phonebook........................................260Main settings........................................................261Phone......................................................................257Phone functions.................................................258

Telephone controls.....................................246Remote control..................................................246

Telephone setup..........................................245Bond another Bluetooth phone...................246Making a phone an active phone................246Phonebook...........................................................245Phonebook categories.....................................246

Telephone.......................................................245General Information.........................................245

TelephoneSee: Using the telephone...............................246

300

Index

Page 303: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Tow Ball............................................................173Driving with a trailer...........................................174Driving without a trailer.....................................175Inserting the tow ball arm................................174Maintenance.........................................................175Removing the tow ball arm.............................175Unlocking the tow ball arm

mechanism.......................................................173Towing a Trailer.............................................170

Steep gradients...................................................170Towing Points................................................188

Installing the towing eye.................................188Towing eye location...........................................188

Towing the Vehicle on FourWheels..........................................................188All vehicles............................................................188Vehicles with automatic

transmission....................................................189Towing...............................................................170Track selection.............................................240

Type 2 and 3........................................................240Traffic information control.......................236

Activating traffic announcements..............236Ending traffic announcements.....................237Traffic announcement volume......................237

Traffic Message Channel..........................285Principle of Operation......................................285

Traffic Sign Recognition............................160Principle of Operation......................................160

Transmission..................................................129Trip Computer.................................................82

Average fuel consumption...............................82Average speed.......................................................82Distance to empty...............................................82Instantaneous fuel consumption..................82Odometer................................................................82Outside air temperature....................................82Resetting the trip computer.............................82Trip Odometer.......................................................82

Type approvals.............................................287Certificate for United Arab Emirates..........289EU Declaration...................................................289FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE.............287Laser sensor........................................................288RX-42 - declaration of conformity..............287

Tyre Care..........................................................216Tyre Pressure Monitoring System...........217

System reset.........................................................218

Tyre PressuresSee: Technical Specifications........................218

Tyre Repair Kit................................................213Checking the tyre pressure..............................215General information...........................................213Inflating the tyre..................................................214Using the tyre repair kit.....................................213

TyresSee: Wheels and Tyres....................................208

UUnder Bonnet Overview - 1.6L

Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)...............192Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L

Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel...................194Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L EcoBoost

SCTi (Sigma)..............................................193Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L

Duratec-HE (MI4).....................................195Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L

Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel..................197USB port............................................................113USB

See: Using a USB device.................................267Using Active City Stop................................162

Switching the system on and off..................163Using active park assist..............................143Using Adaptive Cruise Control................150

Automatic deactivation.....................................151Changing the set speed...................................150Setting a speed...................................................150Setting the vehicle gap....................................150Switching the system off..................................151Switching the system on.................................150Temporarily deactivating the system...........151

Using an iPod................................................268Audio control.......................................................269Operation.............................................................268

Using a USB device.....................................267Audio control......................................................268Operation..............................................................267

301

Index

Page 304: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

Using Cruise Control...................................146Cancelling the set speed.................................146Changing the set speed...................................146Resuming the set speed...................................147Setting a speed...................................................146Switching cruise control off............................147Switching cruise control on............................146

Using driver alert...........................................154Resetting the system........................................155Switching the system on and off..................154System display....................................................155System warnings................................................154

Using Eco mode............................................122Resetting Eco mode...........................................122

Using hill start assist...................................134Activating the system.......................................134Deactivating the system..................................134Vehicles with manual transmission

only......................................................................134Using lane departure warning.................156

Setting the steering wheel vibrationlevel.....................................................................157

Setting the system sensitivity........................157Switching the system on and off..................156System warnings.................................................157

Using seat belts during pregnancy...........27Using Snow Chains.......................................217

Vehicles with stability control (ESP)...........217Using Stability Control................................133Using start-stop............................................120

To re-start the engine.........................................121To stop the engine..............................................120

Using the lane keeping aid........................158Switching the system on and off..................158System warnings................................................159

Using the Parking Aid - Vehicles With:Front and Rear Parking Aid.....................137Manoeuvring with the parking aid...............138Switching the parking aid on and off...........137

Using the Parking Aid - Vehicles With:Rear Parking Aid.........................................136

Using the Rear View Camera...................140Activating the rear view camera...................140Deactivating the rear view camera..............142Using the display..................................................141Vehicles with parking aid.................................142

Using the speed limiter...............................153Intentionally exceeding the set speed

limit.....................................................................153Setting the speed limit.....................................153Switching the system on and off..................153System warnings................................................153

Using the telephone...................................246Changing the active phone............................248Debonding a bonded phone.........................248Making a call........................................................247Muting the microphone..................................248Receiving an incoming call............................248Receiving a second incoming call...............248

Using TMC......................................................285Ending traffic announcements....................285Traffic announcement.....................................285Using TMC messages......................................285

Using traffic sign recognition...................160Setting the system speed warning..............160Switching the system on and off.................160System display....................................................160

Using voice control.....................................249Name tag..............................................................250System operation..............................................249

Using Winter Tyres........................................217

VVehicle battery.............................................206Vehicle Care..................................................204Vehicle Identification Number................222Vehicle Identification Plate.......................221Vehicle identification...................................221Vehicle recovery............................................188Ventilation

See: Climate Control..........................................94Vents

See: Air Vents........................................................94VIN

See: Vehicle Identification Number.............222Voice control.................................................249

Principle of Operation......................................249Voice Control...................................................42

302

Index

Page 305: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

WWarning Lamps and Indicators..................71

ABS warning lamp................................................71Airbag warning lamp............................................71Blind spot monitor indicator..............................71Brake system lamp...............................................71Cruise control indicator.......................................71Direction indicators...............................................71Engine warning lamp...........................................71Forward alert warning indicator......................72Front fog lamp indicator.....................................72Frost warning lamp..............................................72Glow plug indicator..............................................72Headlamp indicator.............................................72Ignition warning lamp.........................................72Lane departure warning indicator..................72Low fuel level warning lamp.............................72Low tyre pressure warning lamp.....................72Main beam indicator............................................72Message indicator.................................................72Oil pressure warning lamp................................72Rear fog lamp indicator......................................73Seat belt reminder...............................................73Stability control (ESP) indicator.....................73Start-stop indicator.............................................73

Warning Triangle............................................177Washer Fluid Check...................................200Washers

See: Wipers and Washers.................................43Washing

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................204Waveband button........................................235Wheels and Tyres........................................208

General Information.........................................208Technical Specifications..................................218

Windows and Mirrors....................................63Windscreen Washers....................................44Windscreen Wipers.......................................43

Automatic wiper system...................................43Intermittent wipe.................................................43

Winter TyresSee: Using Winter Tyres....................................217

Wipers and Washers.....................................43

303

Index

Page 306: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

304

Page 307: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual
Page 308: FORD FOCUS Owner's Manual

(CG3568en)